1 |
205 |
julius |
This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
|
2 |
|
|
|
3 |
|
|
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
4 |
|
|
* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
|
5 |
|
|
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
6 |
|
|
|
7 |
|
|
This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.20.
|
8 |
|
|
|
9 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
|
10 |
|
|
2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software
|
11 |
|
|
Foundation, Inc.
|
12 |
|
|
|
13 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
14 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
|
15 |
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
16 |
|
|
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
|
17 |
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
18 |
|
|
Free Documentation License".
|
19 |
|
|
|
20 |
|
|
|
21 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir)
|
22 |
|
|
|
23 |
|
|
LD
|
24 |
|
|
**
|
25 |
|
|
|
26 |
|
|
This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.20.
|
27 |
|
|
|
28 |
|
|
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
29 |
|
|
Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
|
30 |
|
|
in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
|
31 |
|
|
|
32 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
33 |
|
|
|
34 |
|
|
* Overview:: Overview
|
35 |
|
|
* Invocation:: Invocation
|
36 |
|
|
* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
|
37 |
|
|
|
38 |
|
|
* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
|
39 |
|
|
|
40 |
|
|
* BFD:: BFD
|
41 |
|
|
|
42 |
|
|
* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
43 |
|
|
* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
|
44 |
|
|
* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
45 |
|
|
* LD Index:: LD Index
|
46 |
|
|
|
47 |
|
|
|
48 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Overview, Next: Invocation, Prev: Top, Up: Top
|
49 |
|
|
|
50 |
|
|
1 Overview
|
51 |
|
|
**********
|
52 |
|
|
|
53 |
|
|
`ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
|
54 |
|
|
data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
|
55 |
|
|
a program is to run `ld'.
|
56 |
|
|
|
57 |
|
|
`ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
|
58 |
|
|
AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
|
59 |
|
|
total control over the linking process.
|
60 |
|
|
|
61 |
|
|
This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
|
62 |
|
|
operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
|
63 |
|
|
object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
|
64 |
|
|
Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
|
65 |
|
|
of object file. *Note BFD::, for more information.
|
66 |
|
|
|
67 |
|
|
Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
|
68 |
|
|
linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
|
69 |
|
|
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
|
70 |
|
|
`ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
|
71 |
|
|
some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
|
72 |
|
|
|
73 |
|
|
|
74 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Invocation, Next: Scripts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
|
75 |
|
|
|
76 |
|
|
2 Invocation
|
77 |
|
|
************
|
78 |
|
|
|
79 |
|
|
The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
|
80 |
|
|
to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result, you
|
81 |
|
|
have many choices to control its behavior.
|
82 |
|
|
|
83 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
84 |
|
|
|
85 |
|
|
* Options:: Command Line Options
|
86 |
|
|
* Environment:: Environment Variables
|
87 |
|
|
|
88 |
|
|
|
89 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Options, Next: Environment, Up: Invocation
|
90 |
|
|
|
91 |
|
|
2.1 Command Line Options
|
92 |
|
|
========================
|
93 |
|
|
|
94 |
|
|
The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
|
95 |
|
|
practice few of them are used in any particular context. For instance,
|
96 |
|
|
a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
|
97 |
|
|
standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to link a file
|
98 |
|
|
`hello.o':
|
99 |
|
|
|
100 |
|
|
ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
|
101 |
|
|
|
102 |
|
|
This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
|
103 |
|
|
linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
|
104 |
|
|
which will come from the standard search directories. (See the
|
105 |
|
|
discussion of the `-l' option below.)
|
106 |
|
|
|
107 |
|
|
Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
|
108 |
|
|
point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
|
109 |
|
|
as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
|
110 |
|
|
option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
|
111 |
|
|
other file options. Repeating non-file options with a different
|
112 |
|
|
argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
|
113 |
|
|
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
|
114 |
|
|
option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
|
115 |
|
|
noted in the descriptions below.
|
116 |
|
|
|
117 |
|
|
Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
|
118 |
|
|
linked together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
|
119 |
|
|
command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
|
120 |
|
|
placed between an option and its argument.
|
121 |
|
|
|
122 |
|
|
Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
|
123 |
|
|
can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
|
124 |
|
|
script command language. If _no_ binary input files at all are
|
125 |
|
|
specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
|
126 |
|
|
message `No input files'.
|
127 |
|
|
|
128 |
|
|
If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
|
129 |
|
|
assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
|
130 |
|
|
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
|
131 |
|
|
linker script or the one specified by using `-T'). This feature
|
132 |
|
|
permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
|
133 |
|
|
or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
|
134 |
|
|
`INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects. Specifying a script in this
|
135 |
|
|
way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
|
136 |
|
|
placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
|
137 |
|
|
default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
|
138 |
|
|
command. *Note Scripts::.
|
139 |
|
|
|
140 |
|
|
For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
|
141 |
|
|
either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
|
142 |
|
|
given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
|
143 |
|
|
requires them.
|
144 |
|
|
|
145 |
|
|
For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
|
146 |
|
|
can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
|
147 |
|
|
`--trace-symbol' are equivalent. Note--there is one exception to this
|
148 |
|
|
rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
|
149 |
|
|
only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
|
150 |
|
|
`-o' option. So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
|
151 |
|
|
`magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
|
152 |
|
|
|
153 |
|
|
Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
|
154 |
|
|
the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
|
155 |
|
|
immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
|
156 |
|
|
`--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent. Unique
|
157 |
|
|
abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
|
158 |
|
|
|
159 |
|
|
Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
|
160 |
|
|
driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
|
161 |
|
|
prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
|
162 |
|
|
compiler driver) like this:
|
163 |
|
|
|
164 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
|
165 |
|
|
|
166 |
|
|
This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
|
167 |
|
|
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
|
168 |
|
|
may also arise when passing options that require values through a
|
169 |
|
|
driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
|
170 |
|
|
separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
|
171 |
|
|
and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
|
172 |
|
|
the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
|
173 |
|
|
|
174 |
|
|
gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
|
175 |
|
|
|
176 |
|
|
Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
|
177 |
|
|
GNU linker:
|
178 |
|
|
|
179 |
|
|
`@FILE'
|
180 |
|
|
Read command-line options from FILE. The options read are
|
181 |
|
|
inserted in place of the original @FILE option. If FILE does not
|
182 |
|
|
exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
|
183 |
|
|
literally, and not removed.
|
184 |
|
|
|
185 |
|
|
Options in FILE are separated by whitespace. A whitespace
|
186 |
|
|
character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
|
187 |
|
|
option in either single or double quotes. Any character
|
188 |
|
|
(including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
|
189 |
|
|
to be included with a backslash. The FILE may itself contain
|
190 |
|
|
additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
|
191 |
|
|
recursively.
|
192 |
|
|
|
193 |
|
|
`-a KEYWORD'
|
194 |
|
|
This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The KEYWORD
|
195 |
|
|
argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
|
196 |
|
|
`default'. `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
|
197 |
|
|
and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
|
198 |
|
|
`-Bdynamic'. This option may be used any number of times.
|
199 |
|
|
|
200 |
|
|
`-A ARCHITECTURE'
|
201 |
|
|
`--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
|
202 |
|
|
In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
|
203 |
|
|
Intel 960 family of architectures. In that `ld' configuration, the
|
204 |
|
|
ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
|
205 |
|
|
the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
|
206 |
|
|
archive-library search path. *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
|
207 |
|
|
i960, for details.
|
208 |
|
|
|
209 |
|
|
Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
|
210 |
|
|
other architecture families.
|
211 |
|
|
|
212 |
|
|
`-b INPUT-FORMAT'
|
213 |
|
|
`--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
|
214 |
|
|
`ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
215 |
|
|
file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
|
216 |
|
|
option to specify the binary format for input object files that
|
217 |
|
|
follow this option on the command line. Even when `ld' is
|
218 |
|
|
configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
|
219 |
|
|
usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
|
220 |
|
|
expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
|
221 |
|
|
machine. INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
|
222 |
|
|
format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the
|
223 |
|
|
available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) *Note BFD::.
|
224 |
|
|
|
225 |
|
|
You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
|
226 |
|
|
unusual binary format. You can also use `-b' to switch formats
|
227 |
|
|
explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
|
228 |
|
|
including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
|
229 |
|
|
particular format.
|
230 |
|
|
|
231 |
|
|
The default format is taken from the environment variable
|
232 |
|
|
`GNUTARGET'. *Note Environment::. You can also define the input
|
233 |
|
|
format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
|
234 |
|
|
Commands::.
|
235 |
|
|
|
236 |
|
|
`-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
237 |
|
|
`--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
238 |
|
|
For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
|
239 |
|
|
files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
|
240 |
|
|
described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI. Introduce
|
241 |
|
|
MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
|
242 |
|
|
linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
|
243 |
|
|
language. If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
|
244 |
|
|
directories specified by any `-L' options.
|
245 |
|
|
|
246 |
|
|
`-d'
|
247 |
|
|
`-dc'
|
248 |
|
|
`-dp'
|
249 |
|
|
These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
|
250 |
|
|
for compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common
|
251 |
|
|
symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
|
252 |
|
|
`-r'). The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
|
253 |
|
|
effect. *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
254 |
|
|
|
255 |
|
|
`-e ENTRY'
|
256 |
|
|
`--entry=ENTRY'
|
257 |
|
|
Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
|
258 |
|
|
program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no
|
259 |
|
|
symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
|
260 |
|
|
and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
|
261 |
|
|
in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
|
262 |
|
|
`0' for base 8). *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
|
263 |
|
|
and other ways of specifying the entry point.
|
264 |
|
|
|
265 |
|
|
`--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
|
266 |
|
|
Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
|
267 |
|
|
not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
|
268 |
|
|
by commas or colons. Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
|
269 |
|
|
symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export. This
|
270 |
|
|
option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
271 |
|
|
linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
|
272 |
|
|
explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
|
273 |
|
|
this option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
|
274 |
|
|
option will be treated as hidden.
|
275 |
|
|
|
276 |
|
|
`--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
|
277 |
|
|
Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
|
278 |
|
|
symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
|
279 |
|
|
copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
|
280 |
|
|
the link. The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
|
281 |
|
|
and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
|
282 |
|
|
files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
|
283 |
|
|
for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
|
284 |
|
|
any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
|
285 |
|
|
command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE
|
286 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
|
287 |
|
|
file are still exported, regardless of this option.
|
288 |
|
|
|
289 |
|
|
`-E'
|
290 |
|
|
`--export-dynamic'
|
291 |
|
|
`--no-export-dynamic'
|
292 |
|
|
When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
|
293 |
|
|
option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
|
294 |
|
|
all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table
|
295 |
|
|
is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
|
296 |
|
|
run time.
|
297 |
|
|
|
298 |
|
|
If you do not use either of these options (or use the
|
299 |
|
|
`--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
|
300 |
|
|
dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
|
301 |
|
|
which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
|
302 |
|
|
|
303 |
|
|
If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
|
304 |
|
|
back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
|
305 |
|
|
dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
|
306 |
|
|
linking the program itself.
|
307 |
|
|
|
308 |
|
|
You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
|
309 |
|
|
be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
|
310 |
|
|
it. See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
|
311 |
|
|
|
312 |
|
|
Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE
|
313 |
|
|
targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
|
314 |
|
|
DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
|
315 |
|
|
|
316 |
|
|
`-EB'
|
317 |
|
|
Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
318 |
|
|
|
319 |
|
|
`-EL'
|
320 |
|
|
Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output
|
321 |
|
|
format.
|
322 |
|
|
|
323 |
|
|
`-f NAME'
|
324 |
|
|
`--auxiliary=NAME'
|
325 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
|
326 |
|
|
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
327 |
|
|
the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
|
328 |
|
|
auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
|
329 |
|
|
|
330 |
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
331 |
|
|
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
|
332 |
|
|
field. If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
|
333 |
|
|
object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
|
334 |
|
|
shared object NAME. If there is one, it will be used instead of
|
335 |
|
|
the definition in the filter object. The shared object NAME need
|
336 |
|
|
not exist. Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
|
337 |
|
|
alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
|
338 |
|
|
debugging or for machine specific performance.
|
339 |
|
|
|
340 |
|
|
This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY
|
341 |
|
|
entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
|
342 |
|
|
command line.
|
343 |
|
|
|
344 |
|
|
`-F NAME'
|
345 |
|
|
`--filter=NAME'
|
346 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
|
347 |
|
|
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
348 |
|
|
the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
|
349 |
|
|
should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
|
350 |
|
|
object NAME.
|
351 |
|
|
|
352 |
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
353 |
|
|
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
|
354 |
|
|
field. The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
|
355 |
|
|
symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
|
356 |
|
|
link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME. Thus the
|
357 |
|
|
filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
|
358 |
|
|
provided by the object NAME.
|
359 |
|
|
|
360 |
|
|
Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
|
361 |
|
|
toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
|
362 |
|
|
output object files. The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
|
363 |
|
|
this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
|
364 |
|
|
`TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
|
365 |
|
|
environment variable. The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
|
366 |
|
|
when not creating an ELF shared object.
|
367 |
|
|
|
368 |
|
|
`-fini=NAME'
|
369 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
370 |
|
|
the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
|
371 |
|
|
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_fini'
|
372 |
|
|
as the function to call.
|
373 |
|
|
|
374 |
|
|
`-g'
|
375 |
|
|
Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
|
376 |
|
|
|
377 |
|
|
`-G VALUE'
|
378 |
|
|
`--gpsize=VALUE'
|
379 |
|
|
Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
|
380 |
|
|
register to SIZE. This is only meaningful for object file formats
|
381 |
|
|
such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
|
382 |
|
|
into different sections. This is ignored for other object file
|
383 |
|
|
formats.
|
384 |
|
|
|
385 |
|
|
`-h NAME'
|
386 |
|
|
`-soname=NAME'
|
387 |
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
|
388 |
|
|
field to the specified name. When an executable is linked with a
|
389 |
|
|
shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
|
390 |
|
|
executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
|
391 |
|
|
shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
|
392 |
|
|
using the file name given to the linker.
|
393 |
|
|
|
394 |
|
|
`-i'
|
395 |
|
|
Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
|
396 |
|
|
|
397 |
|
|
`-init=NAME'
|
398 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
399 |
|
|
the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
|
400 |
|
|
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses `_init'
|
401 |
|
|
as the function to call.
|
402 |
|
|
|
403 |
|
|
`-l NAMESPEC'
|
404 |
|
|
`--library=NAMESPEC'
|
405 |
|
|
Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
|
406 |
|
|
of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
|
407 |
|
|
If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
|
408 |
|
|
library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
|
409 |
|
|
the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
410 |
|
|
|
411 |
|
|
On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
|
412 |
|
|
files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'. Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
|
413 |
|
|
systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
|
414 |
|
|
`libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
415 |
|
|
(By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
|
416 |
|
|
Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
|
417 |
|
|
always specifies a file called FILENAME.
|
418 |
|
|
|
419 |
|
|
The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
|
420 |
|
|
it is specified on the command line. If the archive defines a
|
421 |
|
|
symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
|
422 |
|
|
the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
|
423 |
|
|
appropriate file(s) from the archive. However, an undefined
|
424 |
|
|
symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
|
425 |
|
|
cause the linker to search the archive again.
|
426 |
|
|
|
427 |
|
|
See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
|
428 |
|
|
archives multiple times.
|
429 |
|
|
|
430 |
|
|
You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
|
431 |
|
|
|
432 |
|
|
This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
|
433 |
|
|
However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
|
434 |
|
|
from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
|
435 |
|
|
|
436 |
|
|
`-L SEARCHDIR'
|
437 |
|
|
`--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
|
438 |
|
|
Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
|
439 |
|
|
archive libraries and `ld' control scripts. You may use this
|
440 |
|
|
option any number of times. The directories are searched in the
|
441 |
|
|
order in which they are specified on the command line.
|
442 |
|
|
Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
|
443 |
|
|
default directories. All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
|
444 |
|
|
regardless of the order in which the options appear. `-L' options
|
445 |
|
|
do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
|
446 |
|
|
option is specified.
|
447 |
|
|
|
448 |
|
|
If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
|
449 |
|
|
"sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
|
450 |
|
|
|
451 |
|
|
The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
|
452 |
|
|
`-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
|
453 |
|
|
cases also on how it was configured. *Note Environment::.
|
454 |
|
|
|
455 |
|
|
The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
|
456 |
|
|
`SEARCH_DIR' command. Directories specified this way are searched
|
457 |
|
|
at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
|
458 |
|
|
line.
|
459 |
|
|
|
460 |
|
|
`-m EMULATION'
|
461 |
|
|
Emulate the EMULATION linker. You can list the available
|
462 |
|
|
emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
|
463 |
|
|
|
464 |
|
|
If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
|
465 |
|
|
`LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
|
466 |
|
|
|
467 |
|
|
Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
468 |
|
|
configured.
|
469 |
|
|
|
470 |
|
|
`-M'
|
471 |
|
|
`--print-map'
|
472 |
|
|
Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
|
473 |
|
|
information about the link, including the following:
|
474 |
|
|
|
475 |
|
|
* Where object files are mapped into memory.
|
476 |
|
|
|
477 |
|
|
* How common symbols are allocated.
|
478 |
|
|
|
479 |
|
|
* All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
|
480 |
|
|
the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
|
481 |
|
|
|
482 |
|
|
* The values assigned to symbols.
|
483 |
|
|
|
484 |
|
|
Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
|
485 |
|
|
which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
|
486 |
|
|
symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
|
487 |
|
|
This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
|
488 |
|
|
only retains the final value of an expression. Under such
|
489 |
|
|
circumstances the linker will display the final value
|
490 |
|
|
enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a linker
|
491 |
|
|
script containing:
|
492 |
|
|
|
493 |
|
|
foo = 1
|
494 |
|
|
foo = foo * 4
|
495 |
|
|
foo = foo + 8
|
496 |
|
|
|
497 |
|
|
will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
|
498 |
|
|
option is used:
|
499 |
|
|
|
500 |
|
|
0x00000001 foo = 0x1
|
501 |
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
|
502 |
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
|
503 |
|
|
|
504 |
|
|
See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
|
505 |
|
|
expressions in linker scripts.
|
506 |
|
|
|
507 |
|
|
`-n'
|
508 |
|
|
`--nmagic'
|
509 |
|
|
Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
|
510 |
|
|
`NMAGIC' if possible.
|
511 |
|
|
|
512 |
|
|
`-N'
|
513 |
|
|
`--omagic'
|
514 |
|
|
Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also,
|
515 |
|
|
do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
|
516 |
|
|
shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic
|
517 |
|
|
numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
|
518 |
|
|
text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
|
519 |
|
|
to the format specification published by Microsoft.
|
520 |
|
|
|
521 |
|
|
`--no-omagic'
|
522 |
|
|
This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option. It
|
523 |
|
|
sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
|
524 |
|
|
to be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking
|
525 |
|
|
against shared libraries. Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
|
526 |
|
|
|
527 |
|
|
`-o OUTPUT'
|
528 |
|
|
`--output=OUTPUT'
|
529 |
|
|
Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
|
530 |
|
|
option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default. The
|
531 |
|
|
script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
|
532 |
|
|
|
533 |
|
|
`-O LEVEL'
|
534 |
|
|
If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
|
535 |
|
|
output. This might take significantly longer and therefore
|
536 |
|
|
probably should only be enabled for the final binary. At the
|
537 |
|
|
moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
|
538 |
|
|
Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
|
539 |
|
|
Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
|
540 |
|
|
for different non-zero values of this option. Again this may
|
541 |
|
|
change with future releases.
|
542 |
|
|
|
543 |
|
|
`-q'
|
544 |
|
|
`--emit-relocs'
|
545 |
|
|
Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
|
546 |
|
|
Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
|
547 |
|
|
information in order to perform correct modifications of
|
548 |
|
|
executables. This results in larger executables.
|
549 |
|
|
|
550 |
|
|
This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
|
551 |
|
|
|
552 |
|
|
`--force-dynamic'
|
553 |
|
|
Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is
|
554 |
|
|
specific to VxWorks targets.
|
555 |
|
|
|
556 |
|
|
`-r'
|
557 |
|
|
`--relocatable'
|
558 |
|
|
Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
|
559 |
|
|
can in turn serve as input to `ld'. This is often called "partial
|
560 |
|
|
linking". As a side effect, in environments that support standard
|
561 |
|
|
Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
|
562 |
|
|
number to `OMAGIC'. If this option is not specified, an absolute
|
563 |
|
|
file is produced. When linking C++ programs, this option _will
|
564 |
|
|
not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
|
565 |
|
|
|
566 |
|
|
When an input file does not have the same format as the output
|
567 |
|
|
file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
|
568 |
|
|
not contain any relocations. Different output formats can have
|
569 |
|
|
further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
|
570 |
|
|
not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
|
571 |
|
|
all.
|
572 |
|
|
|
573 |
|
|
This option does the same thing as `-i'.
|
574 |
|
|
|
575 |
|
|
`-R FILENAME'
|
576 |
|
|
`--just-symbols=FILENAME'
|
577 |
|
|
Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
|
578 |
|
|
relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output
|
579 |
|
|
file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
|
580 |
|
|
in other programs. You may use this option more than once.
|
581 |
|
|
|
582 |
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
|
583 |
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
584 |
|
|
treated as the `-rpath' option.
|
585 |
|
|
|
586 |
|
|
`-s'
|
587 |
|
|
`--strip-all'
|
588 |
|
|
Omit all symbol information from the output file.
|
589 |
|
|
|
590 |
|
|
`-S'
|
591 |
|
|
`--strip-debug'
|
592 |
|
|
Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
|
593 |
|
|
output file.
|
594 |
|
|
|
595 |
|
|
`-t'
|
596 |
|
|
`--trace'
|
597 |
|
|
Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
|
598 |
|
|
|
599 |
|
|
`-T SCRIPTFILE'
|
600 |
|
|
`--script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
601 |
|
|
Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script. This script replaces `ld''s
|
602 |
|
|
default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
|
603 |
|
|
must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
|
604 |
|
|
*Note Scripts::. If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
|
605 |
|
|
directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
|
606 |
|
|
preceding `-L' options. Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
|
607 |
|
|
|
608 |
|
|
`-dT SCRIPTFILE'
|
609 |
|
|
`--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
610 |
|
|
Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script. *Note Scripts::.
|
611 |
|
|
|
612 |
|
|
This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
|
613 |
|
|
processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
|
614 |
|
|
command line has been processed. This allows options placed after
|
615 |
|
|
the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
|
616 |
|
|
behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
|
617 |
|
|
linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
|
618 |
|
|
(eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
|
619 |
|
|
such as `gcc').
|
620 |
|
|
|
621 |
|
|
`-u SYMBOL'
|
622 |
|
|
`--undefined=SYMBOL'
|
623 |
|
|
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
624 |
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
625 |
|
|
modules from standard libraries. `-u' may be repeated with
|
626 |
|
|
different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
|
627 |
|
|
This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
|
628 |
|
|
|
629 |
|
|
`-Ur'
|
630 |
|
|
For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
|
631 |
|
|
`-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
|
632 |
|
|
can in turn serve as input to `ld'. When linking C++ programs,
|
633 |
|
|
`-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'. It
|
634 |
|
|
does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
|
635 |
|
|
with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
|
636 |
|
|
be added to. Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
|
637 |
|
|
for the others.
|
638 |
|
|
|
639 |
|
|
`--unique[=SECTION]'
|
640 |
|
|
Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
|
641 |
|
|
SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
|
642 |
|
|
for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
|
643 |
|
|
specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
|
644 |
|
|
multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal
|
645 |
|
|
merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
|
646 |
|
|
section assignments in a linker script.
|
647 |
|
|
|
648 |
|
|
`-v'
|
649 |
|
|
`--version'
|
650 |
|
|
`-V'
|
651 |
|
|
Display the version number for `ld'. The `-V' option also lists
|
652 |
|
|
the supported emulations.
|
653 |
|
|
|
654 |
|
|
`-x'
|
655 |
|
|
`--discard-all'
|
656 |
|
|
Delete all local symbols.
|
657 |
|
|
|
658 |
|
|
`-X'
|
659 |
|
|
`--discard-locals'
|
660 |
|
|
Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
|
661 |
|
|
system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
|
662 |
|
|
systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
|
663 |
|
|
|
664 |
|
|
`-y SYMBOL'
|
665 |
|
|
`--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
|
666 |
|
|
Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears. This
|
667 |
|
|
option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is
|
668 |
|
|
necessary to prepend an underscore.
|
669 |
|
|
|
670 |
|
|
This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
|
671 |
|
|
link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
|
672 |
|
|
|
673 |
|
|
`-Y PATH'
|
674 |
|
|
Add PATH to the default library search path. This option exists
|
675 |
|
|
for Solaris compatibility.
|
676 |
|
|
|
677 |
|
|
`-z KEYWORD'
|
678 |
|
|
The recognized keywords are:
|
679 |
|
|
`combreloc'
|
680 |
|
|
Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
|
681 |
|
|
dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
|
682 |
|
|
|
683 |
|
|
`defs'
|
684 |
|
|
Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined
|
685 |
|
|
symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
|
686 |
|
|
|
687 |
|
|
`execstack'
|
688 |
|
|
Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
|
689 |
|
|
|
690 |
|
|
`initfirst'
|
691 |
|
|
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
692 |
|
|
It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
|
693 |
|
|
occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
|
694 |
|
|
brought into the process at the same time. Similarly the
|
695 |
|
|
runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
|
696 |
|
|
runtime finalization of any other objects.
|
697 |
|
|
|
698 |
|
|
`interpose'
|
699 |
|
|
Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
|
700 |
|
|
symbols but the primary executable.
|
701 |
|
|
|
702 |
|
|
`lazy'
|
703 |
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
704 |
|
|
tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
|
705 |
|
|
the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
|
706 |
|
|
than at load time. Lazy binding is the default.
|
707 |
|
|
|
708 |
|
|
`loadfltr'
|
709 |
|
|
Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
|
710 |
|
|
runtime.
|
711 |
|
|
|
712 |
|
|
`muldefs'
|
713 |
|
|
Allows multiple definitions.
|
714 |
|
|
|
715 |
|
|
`nocombreloc'
|
716 |
|
|
Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
|
717 |
|
|
|
718 |
|
|
`nocopyreloc'
|
719 |
|
|
Disables production of copy relocs.
|
720 |
|
|
|
721 |
|
|
`nodefaultlib'
|
722 |
|
|
Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
|
723 |
|
|
object will ignore any default library search paths.
|
724 |
|
|
|
725 |
|
|
`nodelete'
|
726 |
|
|
Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
|
727 |
|
|
|
728 |
|
|
`nodlopen'
|
729 |
|
|
Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
|
730 |
|
|
|
731 |
|
|
`nodump'
|
732 |
|
|
Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
|
733 |
|
|
|
734 |
|
|
`noexecstack'
|
735 |
|
|
Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
|
736 |
|
|
|
737 |
|
|
`norelro'
|
738 |
|
|
Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
|
739 |
|
|
object.
|
740 |
|
|
|
741 |
|
|
`now'
|
742 |
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
743 |
|
|
tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
|
744 |
|
|
program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
|
745 |
|
|
using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
|
746 |
|
|
to the point when the function is first called.
|
747 |
|
|
|
748 |
|
|
`origin'
|
749 |
|
|
Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
|
750 |
|
|
|
751 |
|
|
`relro'
|
752 |
|
|
Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
|
753 |
|
|
|
754 |
|
|
`max-page-size=VALUE'
|
755 |
|
|
Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
|
756 |
|
|
|
757 |
|
|
`common-page-size=VALUE'
|
758 |
|
|
Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
|
759 |
|
|
|
760 |
|
|
|
761 |
|
|
Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
|
762 |
|
|
|
763 |
|
|
`-( ARCHIVES -)'
|
764 |
|
|
`--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
|
765 |
|
|
The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files. They may be
|
766 |
|
|
either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
|
767 |
|
|
|
768 |
|
|
The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
|
769 |
|
|
undefined references are created. Normally, an archive is
|
770 |
|
|
searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
|
771 |
|
|
command line. If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
|
772 |
|
|
undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
|
773 |
|
|
appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
|
774 |
|
|
resolve that reference. By grouping the archives, they all be
|
775 |
|
|
searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
|
776 |
|
|
|
777 |
|
|
Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best
|
778 |
|
|
to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
|
779 |
|
|
between two or more archives.
|
780 |
|
|
|
781 |
|
|
`--accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
782 |
|
|
`--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
783 |
|
|
Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
|
784 |
|
|
recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are
|
785 |
|
|
doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
|
786 |
|
|
This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
|
787 |
|
|
2.14. The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
|
788 |
|
|
reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
789 |
|
|
option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
|
790 |
|
|
|
791 |
|
|
`--as-needed'
|
792 |
|
|
`--no-as-needed'
|
793 |
|
|
This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
|
794 |
|
|
mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
|
795 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
|
796 |
|
|
library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
|
797 |
|
|
library is actually needed. `--as-needed' causes a DT_NEEDED tag
|
798 |
|
|
to only be emitted for a library that satisfies a symbol reference
|
799 |
|
|
from regular objects which is undefined at the point that the
|
800 |
|
|
library was linked, or, if the library is not found in the
|
801 |
|
|
DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, a
|
802 |
|
|
reference from another dynamic library. `--no-as-needed' restores
|
803 |
|
|
the default behaviour.
|
804 |
|
|
|
805 |
|
|
`--add-needed'
|
806 |
|
|
`--no-add-needed'
|
807 |
|
|
This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
|
808 |
|
|
DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
|
809 |
|
|
after the `--no-add-needed' option. Normally, the linker will add
|
810 |
|
|
a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
|
811 |
|
|
`--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
|
812 |
|
|
those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
|
813 |
|
|
default behaviour.
|
814 |
|
|
|
815 |
|
|
`-assert KEYWORD'
|
816 |
|
|
This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
|
817 |
|
|
|
818 |
|
|
`-Bdynamic'
|
819 |
|
|
`-dy'
|
820 |
|
|
`-call_shared'
|
821 |
|
|
Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
822 |
|
|
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. This option
|
823 |
|
|
is normally the default on such platforms. The different variants
|
824 |
|
|
of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
|
825 |
|
|
may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
|
826 |
|
|
library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
|
827 |
|
|
|
828 |
|
|
`-Bgroup'
|
829 |
|
|
Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
|
830 |
|
|
section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
|
831 |
|
|
object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
|
832 |
|
|
`--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied. This option is only
|
833 |
|
|
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
834 |
|
|
|
835 |
|
|
`-Bstatic'
|
836 |
|
|
`-dn'
|
837 |
|
|
`-non_shared'
|
838 |
|
|
`-static'
|
839 |
|
|
Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
840 |
|
|
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
|
841 |
|
|
variants of this option are for compatibility with various
|
842 |
|
|
systems. You may use this option multiple times on the command
|
843 |
|
|
line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
|
844 |
|
|
it. This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
|
845 |
|
|
This option can be used with `-shared'. Doing so means that a
|
846 |
|
|
shared library is being created but that all of the library's
|
847 |
|
|
external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
|
848 |
|
|
static libraries.
|
849 |
|
|
|
850 |
|
|
`-Bsymbolic'
|
851 |
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
|
852 |
|
|
to the definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it
|
853 |
|
|
is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
|
854 |
|
|
override the definition within the shared library. This option is
|
855 |
|
|
only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
856 |
|
|
|
857 |
|
|
`-Bsymbolic-functions'
|
858 |
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
|
859 |
|
|
symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any. This
|
860 |
|
|
option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
|
861 |
|
|
libraries.
|
862 |
|
|
|
863 |
|
|
`--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
|
864 |
|
|
Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
|
865 |
|
|
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
|
866 |
|
|
global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
|
867 |
|
|
definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
|
868 |
|
|
linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
|
869 |
|
|
added to the symbol table in the executable. This option is only
|
870 |
|
|
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
871 |
|
|
|
872 |
|
|
The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
|
873 |
|
|
without scope and node name. See *Note VERSION:: for more
|
874 |
|
|
information.
|
875 |
|
|
|
876 |
|
|
`--dynamic-list-data'
|
877 |
|
|
Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
|
878 |
|
|
|
879 |
|
|
`--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
|
880 |
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
|
881 |
|
|
It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
|
882 |
|
|
|
883 |
|
|
`--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
|
884 |
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
|
885 |
|
|
identification.
|
886 |
|
|
|
887 |
|
|
`--check-sections'
|
888 |
|
|
`--no-check-sections'
|
889 |
|
|
Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
|
890 |
|
|
been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the
|
891 |
|
|
linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
|
892 |
|
|
will produce suitable error messages. The linker does know about,
|
893 |
|
|
and does make allowances for sections in overlays. The default
|
894 |
|
|
behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
|
895 |
|
|
`--check-sections'. Section overlap is not usually checked for
|
896 |
|
|
relocatable links. You can force checking in that case by using
|
897 |
|
|
the `--check-sections' option.
|
898 |
|
|
|
899 |
|
|
`--cref'
|
900 |
|
|
Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
|
901 |
|
|
generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
|
902 |
|
|
Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
|
903 |
|
|
|
904 |
|
|
The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
|
905 |
|
|
easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are
|
906 |
|
|
printed out, sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file
|
907 |
|
|
names is given. If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
|
908 |
|
|
is the location of the definition. The remaining files contain
|
909 |
|
|
references to the symbol.
|
910 |
|
|
|
911 |
|
|
`--no-define-common'
|
912 |
|
|
This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
|
913 |
|
|
The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
|
914 |
|
|
*Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
915 |
|
|
|
916 |
|
|
The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
|
917 |
|
|
assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
|
918 |
|
|
file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
|
919 |
|
|
assigning addresses to Common symbols. Using `--no-define-common'
|
920 |
|
|
allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
|
921 |
|
|
be assigned addresses only in the main program. This eliminates
|
922 |
|
|
the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
|
923 |
|
|
prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
|
924 |
|
|
duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
|
925 |
|
|
search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
|
926 |
|
|
|
927 |
|
|
`--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
|
928 |
|
|
Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
|
929 |
|
|
address given by EXPRESSION. You may use this option as many
|
930 |
|
|
times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
|
931 |
|
|
A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
|
932 |
|
|
this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
|
933 |
|
|
an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
|
934 |
|
|
hexadecimal constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate
|
935 |
|
|
expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
|
936 |
|
|
script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
|
937 |
|
|
_Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
|
938 |
|
|
sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
|
939 |
|
|
|
940 |
|
|
`--demangle[=STYLE]'
|
941 |
|
|
`--no-demangle'
|
942 |
|
|
These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
|
943 |
|
|
messages and other output. When the linker is told to demangle,
|
944 |
|
|
it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
|
945 |
|
|
leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
|
946 |
|
|
and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
|
947 |
|
|
Different compilers have different mangling styles. The optional
|
948 |
|
|
demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
|
949 |
|
|
demangling style for your compiler. The linker will demangle by
|
950 |
|
|
default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
|
951 |
|
|
set. These options may be used to override the default.
|
952 |
|
|
|
953 |
|
|
`-IFILE'
|
954 |
|
|
`--dynamic-linker=FILE'
|
955 |
|
|
Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
|
956 |
|
|
generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
|
957 |
|
|
linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
|
958 |
|
|
you are doing.
|
959 |
|
|
|
960 |
|
|
`--fatal-warnings'
|
961 |
|
|
`--no-fatal-warnings'
|
962 |
|
|
Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be
|
963 |
|
|
restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
|
964 |
|
|
|
965 |
|
|
`--force-exe-suffix'
|
966 |
|
|
Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
|
967 |
|
|
|
968 |
|
|
If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
|
969 |
|
|
`.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
|
970 |
|
|
output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
|
971 |
|
|
option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
|
972 |
|
|
Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
|
973 |
|
|
an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
|
974 |
|
|
|
975 |
|
|
`--gc-sections'
|
976 |
|
|
`--no-gc-sections'
|
977 |
|
|
Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored
|
978 |
|
|
on targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour
|
979 |
|
|
(of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
|
980 |
|
|
specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
|
981 |
|
|
|
982 |
|
|
`--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
|
983 |
|
|
symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry symbol
|
984 |
|
|
and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
|
985 |
|
|
will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
|
986 |
|
|
dynamic objects. Note that when building shared libraries, the
|
987 |
|
|
linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced. Once
|
988 |
|
|
this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
|
989 |
|
|
recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
|
990 |
|
|
relocations. See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
|
991 |
|
|
|
992 |
|
|
This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
|
993 |
|
|
option `-r'). In this case the root of symbols kept must be
|
994 |
|
|
explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
|
995 |
|
|
option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
|
996 |
|
|
|
997 |
|
|
`--print-gc-sections'
|
998 |
|
|
`--no-print-gc-sections'
|
999 |
|
|
List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
|
1000 |
|
|
printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
|
1001 |
|
|
collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option. The
|
1002 |
|
|
default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
|
1003 |
|
|
can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
|
1004 |
|
|
command line.
|
1005 |
|
|
|
1006 |
|
|
`--help'
|
1007 |
|
|
Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
|
1008 |
|
|
and exit.
|
1009 |
|
|
|
1010 |
|
|
`--target-help'
|
1011 |
|
|
Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
|
1012 |
|
|
output and exit.
|
1013 |
|
|
|
1014 |
|
|
`-Map=MAPFILE'
|
1015 |
|
|
Print a link map to the file MAPFILE. See the description of the
|
1016 |
|
|
`-M' option, above.
|
1017 |
|
|
|
1018 |
|
|
`--no-keep-memory'
|
1019 |
|
|
`ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
|
1020 |
|
|
symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells `ld' to
|
1021 |
|
|
instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
|
1022 |
|
|
as necessary. This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
|
1023 |
|
|
space while linking a large executable.
|
1024 |
|
|
|
1025 |
|
|
`--no-undefined'
|
1026 |
|
|
`-z defs'
|
1027 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
|
1028 |
|
|
This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
|
1029 |
|
|
library. The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
|
1030 |
|
|
behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
|
1031 |
|
|
libraries being linked in.
|
1032 |
|
|
|
1033 |
|
|
`--allow-multiple-definition'
|
1034 |
|
|
`-z muldefs'
|
1035 |
|
|
Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
|
1036 |
|
|
report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
|
1037 |
|
|
the first definition will be used.
|
1038 |
|
|
|
1039 |
|
|
`--allow-shlib-undefined'
|
1040 |
|
|
`--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
|
1041 |
|
|
Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries. This
|
1042 |
|
|
switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
|
1043 |
|
|
the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
|
1044 |
|
|
rather than a regular object file. It does not affect how
|
1045 |
|
|
undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
|
1046 |
|
|
|
1047 |
|
|
The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
|
1048 |
|
|
referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
|
1049 |
|
|
create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
|
1050 |
|
|
used to create a shared library.
|
1051 |
|
|
|
1052 |
|
|
The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
|
1053 |
|
|
libraries specified at link time are that:
|
1054 |
|
|
|
1055 |
|
|
* A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
|
1056 |
|
|
as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
|
1057 |
|
|
might actually be resolvable at load time.
|
1058 |
|
|
|
1059 |
|
|
* There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
|
1060 |
|
|
undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
|
1061 |
|
|
|
1062 |
|
|
The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
|
1063 |
|
|
time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
|
1064 |
|
|
current architecture. This is used, for example, to
|
1065 |
|
|
dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
|
1066 |
|
|
|
1067 |
|
|
`--no-undefined-version'
|
1068 |
|
|
Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
|
1069 |
|
|
ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
|
1070 |
|
|
and a fatal error will be issued instead.
|
1071 |
|
|
|
1072 |
|
|
`--default-symver'
|
1073 |
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
1074 |
|
|
unversioned exported symbols.
|
1075 |
|
|
|
1076 |
|
|
`--default-imported-symver'
|
1077 |
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
1078 |
|
|
unversioned imported symbols.
|
1079 |
|
|
|
1080 |
|
|
`--no-warn-mismatch'
|
1081 |
|
|
Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
|
1082 |
|
|
files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
|
1083 |
|
|
have been compiled for different processors or for different
|
1084 |
|
|
endiannesses. This option tells `ld' that it should silently
|
1085 |
|
|
permit such possible errors. This option should only be used with
|
1086 |
|
|
care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
|
1087 |
|
|
ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
|
1088 |
|
|
|
1089 |
|
|
`--no-warn-search-mismatch'
|
1090 |
|
|
Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
|
1091 |
|
|
library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
|
1092 |
|
|
|
1093 |
|
|
`--no-whole-archive'
|
1094 |
|
|
Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
|
1095 |
|
|
archive files.
|
1096 |
|
|
|
1097 |
|
|
`--noinhibit-exec'
|
1098 |
|
|
Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
|
1099 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
|
1100 |
|
|
encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
|
1101 |
|
|
writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
|
1102 |
|
|
|
1103 |
|
|
`-nostdlib'
|
1104 |
|
|
Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
|
1105 |
|
|
command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
|
1106 |
|
|
(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
|
1107 |
|
|
ignored.
|
1108 |
|
|
|
1109 |
|
|
`--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
1110 |
|
|
`ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
1111 |
|
|
file. If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
|
1112 |
|
|
`--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
|
1113 |
|
|
object file. Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
|
1114 |
|
|
object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
|
1115 |
|
|
should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
|
1116 |
|
|
usual format on each machine. OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
|
1117 |
|
|
name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You
|
1118 |
|
|
can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.) The
|
1119 |
|
|
script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
|
1120 |
|
|
but this option overrides it. *Note BFD::.
|
1121 |
|
|
|
1122 |
|
|
`-pie'
|
1123 |
|
|
`--pic-executable'
|
1124 |
|
|
Create a position independent executable. This is currently only
|
1125 |
|
|
supported on ELF platforms. Position independent executables are
|
1126 |
|
|
similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
|
1127 |
|
|
dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
|
1128 |
|
|
(which can vary between invocations). Like normal dynamically
|
1129 |
|
|
linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
|
1130 |
|
|
executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
|
1131 |
|
|
|
1132 |
|
|
`-qmagic'
|
1133 |
|
|
This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
|
1134 |
|
|
|
1135 |
|
|
`-Qy'
|
1136 |
|
|
This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
|
1137 |
|
|
|
1138 |
|
|
`--relax'
|
1139 |
|
|
An option with machine dependent effects. This option is only
|
1140 |
|
|
supported on a few targets. *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
|
1141 |
|
|
*Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960. *Note `ld' and Xtensa
|
1142 |
|
|
Processors: Xtensa. *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
|
1143 |
|
|
M68HC11/68HC12. *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
|
1144 |
|
|
PowerPC ELF32.
|
1145 |
|
|
|
1146 |
|
|
On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
|
1147 |
|
|
optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
|
1148 |
|
|
addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
|
1149 |
|
|
synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
|
1150 |
|
|
|
1151 |
|
|
On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
|
1152 |
|
|
symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible. This
|
1153 |
|
|
is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
|
1154 |
|
|
family of processors.
|
1155 |
|
|
|
1156 |
|
|
On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
|
1157 |
|
|
but ignored.
|
1158 |
|
|
|
1159 |
|
|
`--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
|
1160 |
|
|
Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
|
1161 |
|
|
all others. FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
|
1162 |
|
|
per line. This option is especially useful in environments (such
|
1163 |
|
|
as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
|
1164 |
|
|
gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
|
1165 |
|
|
|
1166 |
|
|
`--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
|
1167 |
|
|
symbols needed for relocations.
|
1168 |
|
|
|
1169 |
|
|
You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
|
1170 |
|
|
line. It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
|
1171 |
|
|
|
1172 |
|
|
`-rpath=DIR'
|
1173 |
|
|
Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used
|
1174 |
|
|
when linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All `-rpath'
|
1175 |
|
|
arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
|
1176 |
|
|
uses them to locate shared objects at runtime. The `-rpath'
|
1177 |
|
|
option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
|
1178 |
|
|
by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
|
1179 |
|
|
description of the `-rpath-link' option. If `-rpath' is not used
|
1180 |
|
|
when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
|
1181 |
|
|
variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
|
1182 |
|
|
|
1183 |
|
|
The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
|
1184 |
|
|
SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
|
1185 |
|
|
`-L' options it is given. If a `-rpath' option is used, the
|
1186 |
|
|
runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
|
1187 |
|
|
options, ignoring the `-L' options. This can be useful when using
|
1188 |
|
|
gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
|
1189 |
|
|
systems.
|
1190 |
|
|
|
1191 |
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
|
1192 |
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
1193 |
|
|
treated as the `-rpath' option.
|
1194 |
|
|
|
1195 |
|
|
`-rpath-link=DIR'
|
1196 |
|
|
When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
|
1197 |
|
|
This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
|
1198 |
|
|
as one of the input files.
|
1199 |
|
|
|
1200 |
|
|
When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
|
1201 |
|
|
non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
|
1202 |
|
|
locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
|
1203 |
|
|
it is not included explicitly. In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
|
1204 |
|
|
option specifies the first set of directories to search. The
|
1205 |
|
|
`-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
|
1206 |
|
|
either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
|
1207 |
|
|
appearing multiple times.
|
1208 |
|
|
|
1209 |
|
|
This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
|
1210 |
|
|
path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
|
1211 |
|
|
such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
|
1212 |
|
|
search path than the runtime linker would do.
|
1213 |
|
|
|
1214 |
|
|
The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
|
1215 |
|
|
shared libraries:
|
1216 |
|
|
1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
|
1217 |
|
|
|
1218 |
|
|
2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options. The difference
|
1219 |
|
|
between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
|
1220 |
|
|
specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
|
1221 |
|
|
and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
|
1222 |
|
|
effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
|
1223 |
|
|
only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
|
1224 |
|
|
been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
|
1225 |
|
|
|
1226 |
|
|
3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
|
1227 |
|
|
`-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
|
1228 |
|
|
the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
|
1229 |
|
|
|
1230 |
|
|
4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
|
1231 |
|
|
directories specified using `-L' options.
|
1232 |
|
|
|
1233 |
|
|
5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
|
1234 |
|
|
environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
|
1235 |
|
|
|
1236 |
|
|
6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
|
1237 |
|
|
`DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
|
1238 |
|
|
libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
|
1239 |
|
|
`DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
|
1240 |
|
|
|
1241 |
|
|
7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
|
1242 |
|
|
|
1243 |
|
|
8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
|
1244 |
|
|
`/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
|
1245 |
|
|
that file.
|
1246 |
|
|
|
1247 |
|
|
If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
|
1248 |
|
|
a warning and continue with the link.
|
1249 |
|
|
|
1250 |
|
|
`-shared'
|
1251 |
|
|
`-Bshareable'
|
1252 |
|
|
Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF,
|
1253 |
|
|
XCOFF and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will
|
1254 |
|
|
automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
|
1255 |
|
|
used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
|
1256 |
|
|
|
1257 |
|
|
`--sort-common'
|
1258 |
|
|
`--sort-common=ascending'
|
1259 |
|
|
`--sort-common=descending'
|
1260 |
|
|
This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
|
1261 |
|
|
ascending or descending order when it places them in the
|
1262 |
|
|
appropriate output sections. The symbol alignments considered are
|
1263 |
|
|
sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
|
1264 |
|
|
one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
|
1265 |
|
|
constraints. If no sorting order is specified, then descending
|
1266 |
|
|
order is assumed.
|
1267 |
|
|
|
1268 |
|
|
`--sort-section=name'
|
1269 |
|
|
This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
|
1270 |
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
1271 |
|
|
|
1272 |
|
|
`--sort-section=alignment'
|
1273 |
|
|
This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
|
1274 |
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
1275 |
|
|
|
1276 |
|
|
`--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
|
1277 |
|
|
Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
|
1278 |
|
|
each input file when SIZE is reached. SIZE defaults to a size of
|
1279 |
|
|
1 if not given.
|
1280 |
|
|
|
1281 |
|
|
`--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
|
1282 |
|
|
Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
|
1283 |
|
|
single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
|
1284 |
|
|
relocations. This is useful when generating huge relocatable
|
1285 |
|
|
files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
|
1286 |
|
|
object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
|
1287 |
|
|
relocations in a single section. Note that this will fail to work
|
1288 |
|
|
with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
|
1289 |
|
|
The linker will not split up individual input sections for
|
1290 |
|
|
redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
|
1291 |
|
|
COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
|
1292 |
|
|
relocations. COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
|
1293 |
|
|
|
1294 |
|
|
`--stats'
|
1295 |
|
|
Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
|
1296 |
|
|
such as execution time and memory usage.
|
1297 |
|
|
|
1298 |
|
|
`--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
|
1299 |
|
|
Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
|
1300 |
|
|
configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
|
1301 |
|
|
that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
|
1302 |
|
|
|
1303 |
|
|
`--traditional-format'
|
1304 |
|
|
For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
|
1305 |
|
|
the output of some existing linker. This switch requests `ld' to
|
1306 |
|
|
use the traditional format instead.
|
1307 |
|
|
|
1308 |
|
|
For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
|
1309 |
|
|
symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file
|
1310 |
|
|
with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
|
1311 |
|
|
Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
|
1312 |
|
|
program (`gdb' has no trouble). The `--traditional-format' switch
|
1313 |
|
|
tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
|
1314 |
|
|
|
1315 |
|
|
`--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
|
1316 |
|
|
Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
|
1317 |
|
|
by ORG. You may use this option as many times as necessary to
|
1318 |
|
|
locate multiple sections in the command line. ORG must be a
|
1319 |
|
|
single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
|
1320 |
|
|
you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
|
1321 |
|
|
values. _Note:_ there should be no white space between
|
1322 |
|
|
SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
|
1323 |
|
|
|
1324 |
|
|
`-Tbss=ORG'
|
1325 |
|
|
`-Tdata=ORG'
|
1326 |
|
|
`-Ttext=ORG'
|
1327 |
|
|
Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
|
1328 |
|
|
SECTIONNAME.
|
1329 |
|
|
|
1330 |
|
|
`-Ttext-segment=ORG'
|
1331 |
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
|
1332 |
|
|
address of the first byte of the text segment.
|
1333 |
|
|
|
1334 |
|
|
`--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
|
1335 |
|
|
Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four
|
1336 |
|
|
possible values for `method':
|
1337 |
|
|
|
1338 |
|
|
`ignore-all'
|
1339 |
|
|
Do not report any unresolved symbols.
|
1340 |
|
|
|
1341 |
|
|
`report-all'
|
1342 |
|
|
Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
|
1343 |
|
|
|
1344 |
|
|
`ignore-in-object-files'
|
1345 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
|
1346 |
|
|
libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
|
1347 |
|
|
files.
|
1348 |
|
|
|
1349 |
|
|
`ignore-in-shared-libs'
|
1350 |
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
|
1351 |
|
|
files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
|
1352 |
|
|
This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
|
1353 |
|
|
known that all the shared libraries that it should be
|
1354 |
|
|
referencing are included on the linker's command line.
|
1355 |
|
|
|
1356 |
|
|
The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
|
1357 |
|
|
controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
|
1358 |
|
|
|
1359 |
|
|
Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
|
1360 |
|
|
reported unresolved symbol but the option
|
1361 |
|
|
`--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
|
1362 |
|
|
|
1363 |
|
|
`--dll-verbose'
|
1364 |
|
|
`--verbose'
|
1365 |
|
|
Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
|
1366 |
|
|
supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
|
1367 |
|
|
Display the linker script being used by the linker.
|
1368 |
|
|
|
1369 |
|
|
`--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
|
1370 |
|
|
Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is
|
1371 |
|
|
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
|
1372 |
|
|
additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
|
1373 |
|
|
being created. This option is only fully supported on ELF
|
1374 |
|
|
platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::. It
|
1375 |
|
|
is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
|
1376 |
|
|
scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
|
1377 |
|
|
symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
|
1378 |
|
|
*Note WIN32::.
|
1379 |
|
|
|
1380 |
|
|
`--warn-common'
|
1381 |
|
|
Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
|
1382 |
|
|
or with a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat
|
1383 |
|
|
sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
|
1384 |
|
|
not. This option allows you to find potential problems from
|
1385 |
|
|
combining global symbols. Unfortunately, some C libraries use
|
1386 |
|
|
this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
|
1387 |
|
|
libraries as well as in your programs.
|
1388 |
|
|
|
1389 |
|
|
There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
|
1390 |
|
|
examples:
|
1391 |
|
|
|
1392 |
|
|
`int i = 1;'
|
1393 |
|
|
A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
|
1394 |
|
|
the output file.
|
1395 |
|
|
|
1396 |
|
|
`extern int i;'
|
1397 |
|
|
An undefined reference, which does not allocate space. There
|
1398 |
|
|
must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
|
1399 |
|
|
variable somewhere.
|
1400 |
|
|
|
1401 |
|
|
`int i;'
|
1402 |
|
|
A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common
|
1403 |
|
|
symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
|
1404 |
|
|
area of the output file. The linker merges multiple common
|
1405 |
|
|
symbols for the same variable into a single symbol. If they
|
1406 |
|
|
are of different sizes, it picks the largest size. The
|
1407 |
|
|
linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
|
1408 |
|
|
a definition of the same variable.
|
1409 |
|
|
|
1410 |
|
|
The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
|
1411 |
|
|
Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
|
1412 |
|
|
symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
|
1413 |
|
|
symbol encountered with the same name. One or both of the two
|
1414 |
|
|
symbols will be a common symbol.
|
1415 |
|
|
|
1416 |
|
|
1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
|
1417 |
|
|
already a definition for the symbol.
|
1418 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
1419 |
|
|
overridden by definition
|
1420 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
|
1421 |
|
|
|
1422 |
|
|
2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
|
1423 |
|
|
definition for the symbol is encountered. This is the same
|
1424 |
|
|
as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
|
1425 |
|
|
in a different order.
|
1426 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
|
1427 |
|
|
overriding common
|
1428 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
|
1429 |
|
|
|
1430 |
|
|
3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
|
1431 |
|
|
symbol.
|
1432 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
|
1433 |
|
|
of `SYMBOL'
|
1434 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
|
1435 |
|
|
|
1436 |
|
|
4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
|
1437 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
1438 |
|
|
overridden by larger common
|
1439 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
|
1440 |
|
|
|
1441 |
|
|
5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
|
1442 |
|
|
symbol. This is the same as the previous case, except that
|
1443 |
|
|
the symbols are encountered in a different order.
|
1444 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
1445 |
|
|
overriding smaller common
|
1446 |
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
|
1447 |
|
|
|
1448 |
|
|
`--warn-constructors'
|
1449 |
|
|
Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for
|
1450 |
|
|
a few object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the
|
1451 |
|
|
linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
|
1452 |
|
|
|
1453 |
|
|
`--warn-multiple-gp'
|
1454 |
|
|
Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
|
1455 |
|
|
file. This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
|
1456 |
|
|
Alpha. Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
|
1457 |
|
|
in a special section. A special register (the global pointer)
|
1458 |
|
|
points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
|
1459 |
|
|
loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
|
1460 |
|
|
Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
|
1461 |
|
|
relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
|
1462 |
|
|
the constant pool. Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
|
1463 |
|
|
to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
|
1464 |
|
|
address all possible constants. This option causes a warning to
|
1465 |
|
|
be issued whenever this case occurs.
|
1466 |
|
|
|
1467 |
|
|
`--warn-once'
|
1468 |
|
|
Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
|
1469 |
|
|
module which refers to it.
|
1470 |
|
|
|
1471 |
|
|
`--warn-section-align'
|
1472 |
|
|
Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
|
1473 |
|
|
alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
|
1474 |
|
|
section. The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
|
1475 |
|
|
specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
|
1476 |
|
|
start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
|
1477 |
|
|
|
1478 |
|
|
`--warn-shared-textrel'
|
1479 |
|
|
Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
|
1480 |
|
|
|
1481 |
|
|
`--warn-alternate-em'
|
1482 |
|
|
Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
|
1483 |
|
|
|
1484 |
|
|
`--warn-unresolved-symbols'
|
1485 |
|
|
If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
|
1486 |
|
|
option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
|
1487 |
|
|
This option makes it generate a warning instead.
|
1488 |
|
|
|
1489 |
|
|
`--error-unresolved-symbols'
|
1490 |
|
|
This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
|
1491 |
|
|
when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
|
1492 |
|
|
|
1493 |
|
|
`--whole-archive'
|
1494 |
|
|
For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
|
1495 |
|
|
`--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
|
1496 |
|
|
in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
|
1497 |
|
|
object files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into
|
1498 |
|
|
a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
|
1499 |
|
|
resulting shared library. This option may be used more than once.
|
1500 |
|
|
|
1501 |
|
|
Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
|
1502 |
|
|
about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
|
1503 |
|
|
Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
|
1504 |
|
|
list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
|
1505 |
|
|
your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
|
1506 |
|
|
|
1507 |
|
|
`--wrap=SYMBOL'
|
1508 |
|
|
Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL. Any undefined reference to
|
1509 |
|
|
SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'. Any undefined
|
1510 |
|
|
reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
|
1511 |
|
|
|
1512 |
|
|
This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
|
1513 |
|
|
wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'. If it wishes
|
1514 |
|
|
to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
|
1515 |
|
|
|
1516 |
|
|
Here is a trivial example:
|
1517 |
|
|
|
1518 |
|
|
void *
|
1519 |
|
|
__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
|
1520 |
|
|
{
|
1521 |
|
|
printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
|
1522 |
|
|
return __real_malloc (c);
|
1523 |
|
|
}
|
1524 |
|
|
|
1525 |
|
|
If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
|
1526 |
|
|
all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
|
1527 |
|
|
instead. The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
|
1528 |
|
|
the real `malloc' function.
|
1529 |
|
|
|
1530 |
|
|
You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
|
1531 |
|
|
links without the `--wrap' option will succeed. If you do this,
|
1532 |
|
|
you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
|
1533 |
|
|
file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
|
1534 |
|
|
call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
|
1535 |
|
|
|
1536 |
|
|
`--eh-frame-hdr'
|
1537 |
|
|
Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
|
1538 |
|
|
`PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
|
1539 |
|
|
|
1540 |
|
|
`--enable-new-dtags'
|
1541 |
|
|
`--disable-new-dtags'
|
1542 |
|
|
This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
|
1543 |
|
|
ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
|
1544 |
|
|
`--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
|
1545 |
|
|
If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
|
1546 |
|
|
created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
|
1547 |
|
|
that those options are only available for ELF systems.
|
1548 |
|
|
|
1549 |
|
|
`--hash-size=NUMBER'
|
1550 |
|
|
Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
|
1551 |
|
|
close to NUMBER. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
|
1552 |
|
|
time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
|
1553 |
|
|
increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing
|
1554 |
|
|
this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
|
1555 |
|
|
speed.
|
1556 |
|
|
|
1557 |
|
|
`--hash-style=STYLE'
|
1558 |
|
|
Set the type of linker's hash table(s). STYLE can be either
|
1559 |
|
|
`sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
|
1560 |
|
|
`.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
|
1561 |
|
|
new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables. The default is `sysv'.
|
1562 |
|
|
|
1563 |
|
|
`--reduce-memory-overheads'
|
1564 |
|
|
This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
|
1565 |
|
|
expense of linking speed. This was introduced to select the old
|
1566 |
|
|
O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
|
1567 |
|
|
O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
|
1568 |
|
|
|
1569 |
|
|
Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
|
1570 |
|
|
to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
|
1571 |
|
|
linker's run time. This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
|
1572 |
|
|
switch has been used.
|
1573 |
|
|
|
1574 |
|
|
The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
|
1575 |
|
|
enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
|
1576 |
|
|
|
1577 |
|
|
`--build-id'
|
1578 |
|
|
`--build-id=STYLE'
|
1579 |
|
|
Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section. The
|
1580 |
|
|
contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
|
1581 |
|
|
STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
|
1582 |
|
|
160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
|
1583 |
|
|
`md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
|
1584 |
|
|
output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
|
1585 |
|
|
specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
|
1586 |
|
|
characters between digit pairs are ignored). If STYLE is omitted,
|
1587 |
|
|
`sha1' is used.
|
1588 |
|
|
|
1589 |
|
|
The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
|
1590 |
|
|
the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
|
1591 |
|
|
nonidentical output files. It is not intended to be compared as a
|
1592 |
|
|
checksum for the file's contents. A linked file may be changed
|
1593 |
|
|
later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
|
1594 |
|
|
original linked file does not change.
|
1595 |
|
|
|
1596 |
|
|
Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
|
1597 |
|
|
`--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
|
1598 |
|
|
|
1599 |
|
|
2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
|
1600 |
|
|
-----------------------------------------
|
1601 |
|
|
|
1602 |
|
|
The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
|
1603 |
|
|
output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
|
1604 |
|
|
executable. You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
|
1605 |
|
|
option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
|
1606 |
|
|
files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
|
1607 |
|
|
file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
|
1608 |
|
|
ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
|
1609 |
|
|
|
1610 |
|
|
In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
|
1611 |
|
|
support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
|
1612 |
|
|
PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their values
|
1613 |
|
|
by either a space or an equals sign.
|
1614 |
|
|
|
1615 |
|
|
`--add-stdcall-alias'
|
1616 |
|
|
If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
|
1617 |
|
|
as-is and also with the suffix stripped. [This option is specific
|
1618 |
|
|
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1619 |
|
|
|
1620 |
|
|
`--base-file FILE'
|
1621 |
|
|
Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
|
1622 |
|
|
of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
|
1623 |
|
|
[This is an i386 PE specific option]
|
1624 |
|
|
|
1625 |
|
|
`--dll'
|
1626 |
|
|
Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
|
1627 |
|
|
`-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file. [This
|
1628 |
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1629 |
|
|
|
1630 |
|
|
`--enable-long-section-names'
|
1631 |
|
|
`--disable-long-section-names'
|
1632 |
|
|
The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
|
1633 |
|
|
permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
|
1634 |
|
|
normal limit for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed
|
1635 |
|
|
in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
|
1636 |
|
|
the Coff string table required to support the longer names. As a
|
1637 |
|
|
GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
|
1638 |
|
|
images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!) disallow it in
|
1639 |
|
|
object files, by using these two options. Executable images
|
1640 |
|
|
generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
|
1641 |
|
|
carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
|
1642 |
|
|
output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
|
1643 |
|
|
viewers and dumpers. However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
|
1644 |
|
|
section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
|
1645 |
|
|
executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
|
1646 |
|
|
on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
|
1647 |
|
|
overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
|
1648 |
|
|
finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
|
1649 |
|
|
image and not stripping symbols. [This option is valid for all PE
|
1650 |
|
|
targeted ports of the linker]
|
1651 |
|
|
|
1652 |
|
|
`--enable-stdcall-fixup'
|
1653 |
|
|
`--disable-stdcall-fixup'
|
1654 |
|
|
If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
|
1655 |
|
|
to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
|
1656 |
|
|
differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
|
1657 |
|
|
and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For
|
1658 |
|
|
example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
|
1659 |
|
|
function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
|
1660 |
|
|
linked to the function `_bar'. When the linker does this, it
|
1661 |
|
|
prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
|
1662 |
|
|
but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
|
1663 |
|
|
need this feature to be usable. If you specify
|
1664 |
|
|
`--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
|
1665 |
|
|
warnings are not printed. If you specify
|
1666 |
|
|
`--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
|
1667 |
|
|
mismatches are considered to be errors. [This option is specific
|
1668 |
|
|
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1669 |
|
|
|
1670 |
|
|
`--export-all-symbols'
|
1671 |
|
|
If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
|
1672 |
|
|
will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if
|
1673 |
|
|
there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
|
1674 |
|
|
explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
|
1675 |
|
|
function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
|
1676 |
|
|
unless this option is given. Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
|
1677 |
|
|
`DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
|
1678 |
|
|
not be automatically exported. Also, symbols imported from other
|
1679 |
|
|
DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
|
1680 |
|
|
DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
|
1681 |
|
|
ending with `_iname'. In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
|
1682 |
|
|
`libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported. Symbols
|
1683 |
|
|
whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
|
1684 |
|
|
exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an extensive
|
1685 |
|
|
list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
|
1686 |
|
|
this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets). These
|
1687 |
|
|
cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
1688 |
|
|
`_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
1689 |
|
|
`_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
|
1690 |
|
|
`cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
|
1691 |
|
|
`environ'. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
1692 |
|
|
of the linker]
|
1693 |
|
|
|
1694 |
|
|
`--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
|
1695 |
|
|
Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
|
1696 |
|
|
exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
|
1697 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1698 |
|
|
linker]
|
1699 |
|
|
|
1700 |
|
|
`--file-alignment'
|
1701 |
|
|
Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always
|
1702 |
|
|
begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number. This
|
1703 |
|
|
defaults to 512. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
|
1704 |
|
|
port of the linker]
|
1705 |
|
|
|
1706 |
|
|
`--heap RESERVE'
|
1707 |
|
|
`--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
1708 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
1709 |
|
|
commit) to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb
|
1710 |
|
|
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1711 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1712 |
|
|
|
1713 |
|
|
`--image-base VALUE'
|
1714 |
|
|
Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll. This is the
|
1715 |
|
|
lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
1716 |
|
|
is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
|
1717 |
|
|
of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
|
1718 |
|
|
overlap any other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables,
|
1719 |
|
|
and 0x10000000 for dlls. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1720 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1721 |
|
|
|
1722 |
|
|
`--kill-at'
|
1723 |
|
|
If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
|
1724 |
|
|
before they are exported. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1725 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1726 |
|
|
|
1727 |
|
|
`--large-address-aware'
|
1728 |
|
|
If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
|
1729 |
|
|
the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
|
1730 |
|
|
virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used
|
1731 |
|
|
in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
|
1732 |
|
|
the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise,
|
1733 |
|
|
this bit has no effect. [This option is specific to PE targeted
|
1734 |
|
|
ports of the linker]
|
1735 |
|
|
|
1736 |
|
|
`--major-image-version VALUE'
|
1737 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the "image version". Defaults to 1.
|
1738 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1739 |
|
|
linker]
|
1740 |
|
|
|
1741 |
|
|
`--major-os-version VALUE'
|
1742 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the "os version". Defaults to 4. [This
|
1743 |
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1744 |
|
|
|
1745 |
|
|
`--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
1746 |
|
|
Sets the major number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 4.
|
1747 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1748 |
|
|
linker]
|
1749 |
|
|
|
1750 |
|
|
`--minor-image-version VALUE'
|
1751 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "image version". Defaults to 0.
|
1752 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1753 |
|
|
linker]
|
1754 |
|
|
|
1755 |
|
|
`--minor-os-version VALUE'
|
1756 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "os version". Defaults to 0. [This
|
1757 |
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1758 |
|
|
|
1759 |
|
|
`--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
1760 |
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 0.
|
1761 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1762 |
|
|
linker]
|
1763 |
|
|
|
1764 |
|
|
`--output-def FILE'
|
1765 |
|
|
The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
|
1766 |
|
|
corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
|
1767 |
|
|
(which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
|
1768 |
|
|
library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
|
1769 |
|
|
automatically or implicitly exported symbols. [This option is
|
1770 |
|
|
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1771 |
|
|
|
1772 |
|
|
`--out-implib FILE'
|
1773 |
|
|
The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
|
1774 |
|
|
lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
|
1775 |
|
|
lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
|
1776 |
|
|
clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
|
1777 |
|
|
possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
|
1778 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1779 |
|
|
linker]
|
1780 |
|
|
|
1781 |
|
|
`--enable-auto-image-base'
|
1782 |
|
|
Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
|
1783 |
|
|
specified using the `--image-base' argument. By using a hash
|
1784 |
|
|
generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
|
1785 |
|
|
DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
|
1786 |
|
|
execution are avoided. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1787 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1788 |
|
|
|
1789 |
|
|
`--disable-auto-image-base'
|
1790 |
|
|
Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
|
1791 |
|
|
user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
|
1792 |
|
|
default. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
1793 |
|
|
the linker]
|
1794 |
|
|
|
1795 |
|
|
`--dll-search-prefix STRING'
|
1796 |
|
|
When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
|
1797 |
|
|
search for `.dll' in preference to
|
1798 |
|
|
`lib.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
|
1799 |
|
|
between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
|
1800 |
|
|
uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
|
1801 |
|
|
`--dll-search-prefix=cyg'. [This option is specific to the i386
|
1802 |
|
|
PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1803 |
|
|
|
1804 |
|
|
`--enable-auto-import'
|
1805 |
|
|
Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
|
1806 |
|
|
imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
|
1807 |
|
|
building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
|
1808 |
|
|
of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
|
1809 |
|
|
image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
|
1810 |
|
|
PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
|
1811 |
|
|
|
1812 |
|
|
Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
|
1813 |
|
|
data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
|
1814 |
|
|
placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
|
1815 |
|
|
around a problem with consts that is described here:
|
1816 |
|
|
http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
|
1817 |
|
|
|
1818 |
|
|
Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
|
1819 |
|
|
may see this message:
|
1820 |
|
|
|
1821 |
|
|
"variable '' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
1822 |
|
|
documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
1823 |
|
|
|
1824 |
|
|
This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
|
1825 |
|
|
ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
|
1826 |
|
|
only allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses
|
1827 |
|
|
to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
|
1828 |
|
|
as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
|
1829 |
|
|
DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
|
1830 |
|
|
trigger this error condition. However, regardless of the exact
|
1831 |
|
|
data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
|
1832 |
|
|
detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
|
1833 |
|
|
|
1834 |
|
|
There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
|
1835 |
|
|
the data type of the exported variable:
|
1836 |
|
|
|
1837 |
|
|
One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
|
1838 |
|
|
the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
|
1839 |
|
|
environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
|
1840 |
|
|
supports this feature.
|
1841 |
|
|
|
1842 |
|
|
A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
|
1843 |
|
|
variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
|
1844 |
|
|
For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
|
1845 |
|
|
array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
|
1846 |
|
|
variable. Thus:
|
1847 |
|
|
|
1848 |
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
1849 |
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
1850 |
|
|
{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
|
1851 |
|
|
|
1852 |
|
|
or
|
1853 |
|
|
|
1854 |
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
1855 |
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
1856 |
|
|
{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
|
1857 |
|
|
|
1858 |
|
|
For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
|
1859 |
|
|
is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
|
1860 |
|
|
variable:
|
1861 |
|
|
|
1862 |
|
|
extern struct s extern_struct;
|
1863 |
|
|
extern_struct.field -->
|
1864 |
|
|
{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
|
1865 |
|
|
|
1866 |
|
|
or
|
1867 |
|
|
|
1868 |
|
|
extern long long extern_ll;
|
1869 |
|
|
extern_ll -->
|
1870 |
|
|
{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
|
1871 |
|
|
|
1872 |
|
|
A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
|
1873 |
|
|
'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
|
1874 |
|
|
`__declspec(dllimport)'. However, in practise that requires using
|
1875 |
|
|
compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
|
1876 |
|
|
building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
|
1877 |
|
|
building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
|
1878 |
|
|
between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
|
1879 |
|
|
constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
|
1880 |
|
|
usage:
|
1881 |
|
|
|
1882 |
|
|
Original:
|
1883 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
1884 |
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
1885 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
1886 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
1887 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
1888 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
1889 |
|
|
}
|
1890 |
|
|
|
1891 |
|
|
Solution 1:
|
1892 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
1893 |
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
1894 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
1895 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
1896 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
1897 |
|
|
/* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
|
1898 |
|
|
volatile int *parr = arr;
|
1899 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
|
1900 |
|
|
}
|
1901 |
|
|
|
1902 |
|
|
Solution 2:
|
1903 |
|
|
--foo.h
|
1904 |
|
|
/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
|
1905 |
|
|
#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
|
1906 |
|
|
!(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
|
1907 |
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
1908 |
|
|
#else
|
1909 |
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT
|
1910 |
|
|
#endif
|
1911 |
|
|
extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
|
1912 |
|
|
--foo.c
|
1913 |
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
1914 |
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
1915 |
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
1916 |
|
|
}
|
1917 |
|
|
|
1918 |
|
|
A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
|
1919 |
|
|
use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
|
1920 |
|
|
offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
|
1921 |
|
|
functions). [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
1922 |
|
|
of the linker]
|
1923 |
|
|
|
1924 |
|
|
`--disable-auto-import'
|
1925 |
|
|
Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
|
1926 |
|
|
`__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs. [This option is
|
1927 |
|
|
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1928 |
|
|
|
1929 |
|
|
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
1930 |
|
|
If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
|
1931 |
|
|
section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
|
1932 |
|
|
switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
|
1933 |
|
|
can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
|
1934 |
|
|
data in your client code. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1935 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1936 |
|
|
|
1937 |
|
|
`--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
1938 |
|
|
Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
|
1939 |
|
|
from DLLs. This is the default. [This option is specific to the
|
1940 |
|
|
i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1941 |
|
|
|
1942 |
|
|
`--enable-extra-pe-debug'
|
1943 |
|
|
Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
|
1944 |
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
1945 |
|
|
linker]
|
1946 |
|
|
|
1947 |
|
|
`--section-alignment'
|
1948 |
|
|
Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin
|
1949 |
|
|
at addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to
|
1950 |
|
|
0x1000. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
1951 |
|
|
the linker]
|
1952 |
|
|
|
1953 |
|
|
`--stack RESERVE'
|
1954 |
|
|
`--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
1955 |
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
1956 |
|
|
commit) to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb
|
1957 |
|
|
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
1958 |
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
1959 |
|
|
|
1960 |
|
|
`--subsystem WHICH'
|
1961 |
|
|
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
|
1962 |
|
|
`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
|
1963 |
|
|
Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
1964 |
|
|
legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
|
1965 |
|
|
`posix', and `xbox'. You may optionally set the subsystem version
|
1966 |
|
|
also. Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH. [This option
|
1967 |
|
|
is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
1968 |
|
|
|
1969 |
|
|
The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
|
1970 |
|
|
of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
|
1971 |
|
|
ports of the linker]
|
1972 |
|
|
|
1973 |
|
|
`--dynamicbase'
|
1974 |
|
|
The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
|
1975 |
|
|
randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
|
1976 |
|
|
Vista for i386 PE targets.
|
1977 |
|
|
|
1978 |
|
|
`--forceinteg'
|
1979 |
|
|
Code integrity checks are enforced.
|
1980 |
|
|
|
1981 |
|
|
`--nxcompat'
|
1982 |
|
|
The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention. This
|
1983 |
|
|
feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
|
1984 |
|
|
|
1985 |
|
|
`--no-isolation'
|
1986 |
|
|
Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
|
1987 |
|
|
|
1988 |
|
|
`--no-seh'
|
1989 |
|
|
The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
|
1990 |
|
|
image.
|
1991 |
|
|
|
1992 |
|
|
`--no-bind'
|
1993 |
|
|
Do not bind this image.
|
1994 |
|
|
|
1995 |
|
|
`--wdmdriver'
|
1996 |
|
|
The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
|
1997 |
|
|
|
1998 |
|
|
`--tsaware'
|
1999 |
|
|
The image is Terminal Server aware.
|
2000 |
|
|
|
2001 |
|
|
|
2002 |
|
|
2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
|
2003 |
|
|
------------------------------------------------------------
|
2004 |
|
|
|
2005 |
|
|
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
|
2006 |
|
|
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
|
2007 |
|
|
|
2008 |
|
|
`--no-trampoline'
|
2009 |
|
|
This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
|
2010 |
|
|
trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
|
2011 |
|
|
using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
|
2012 |
|
|
function is taken).
|
2013 |
|
|
|
2014 |
|
|
`--bank-window NAME'
|
2015 |
|
|
This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
|
2016 |
|
|
in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
|
2017 |
|
|
window. The definition of such region is then used by the linker
|
2018 |
|
|
to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
|
2019 |
|
|
|
2020 |
|
|
|
2021 |
|
|
2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
|
2022 |
|
|
---------------------------------------------
|
2023 |
|
|
|
2024 |
|
|
The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
|
2025 |
|
|
generation when linking for 68K targets.
|
2026 |
|
|
|
2027 |
|
|
`--got=TYPE'
|
2028 |
|
|
This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
|
2029 |
|
|
TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
|
2030 |
|
|
`target'. For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
|
2031 |
|
|
|
2032 |
|
|
|
2033 |
|
|
|
2034 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Environment, Prev: Options, Up: Invocation
|
2035 |
|
|
|
2036 |
|
|
2.2 Environment Variables
|
2037 |
|
|
=========================
|
2038 |
|
|
|
2039 |
|
|
You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
|
2040 |
|
|
`GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
|
2041 |
|
|
|
2042 |
|
|
`GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
|
2043 |
|
|
`-b' (or its synonym `--format'). Its value should be one of the BFD
|
2044 |
|
|
names for an input format (*note BFD::). If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
|
2045 |
|
|
the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
|
2046 |
|
|
`GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
|
2047 |
|
|
format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
|
2048 |
|
|
there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
|
2049 |
|
|
that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
|
2050 |
|
|
However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
|
2051 |
|
|
conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
|
2052 |
|
|
ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
|
2053 |
|
|
|
2054 |
|
|
`LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
|
2055 |
|
|
`-m' option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
|
2056 |
|
|
behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
|
2057 |
|
|
available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options. If the `-m'
|
2058 |
|
|
option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
|
2059 |
|
|
defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
2060 |
|
|
configured.
|
2061 |
|
|
|
2062 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
|
2063 |
|
|
`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
|
2064 |
|
|
to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in a
|
2065 |
|
|
similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program. The default may
|
2066 |
|
|
be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
|
2067 |
|
|
|
2068 |
|
|
|
2069 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Scripts, Next: Machine Dependent, Prev: Invocation, Up: Top
|
2070 |
|
|
|
2071 |
|
|
3 Linker Scripts
|
2072 |
|
|
****************
|
2073 |
|
|
|
2074 |
|
|
Every link is controlled by a "linker script". This script is written
|
2075 |
|
|
in the linker command language.
|
2076 |
|
|
|
2077 |
|
|
The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
|
2078 |
|
|
sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
|
2079 |
|
|
to control the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts
|
2080 |
|
|
do nothing more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script
|
2081 |
|
|
can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
|
2082 |
|
|
commands described below.
|
2083 |
|
|
|
2084 |
|
|
The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
|
2085 |
|
|
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
|
2086 |
|
|
linker executable. You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
|
2087 |
|
|
display the default linker script. Certain command line options, such
|
2088 |
|
|
as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
|
2089 |
|
|
|
2090 |
|
|
You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
|
2091 |
|
|
option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
|
2092 |
|
|
linker script.
|
2093 |
|
|
|
2094 |
|
|
You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
|
2095 |
|
|
files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. *Note
|
2096 |
|
|
Implicit Linker Scripts::.
|
2097 |
|
|
|
2098 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2099 |
|
|
|
2100 |
|
|
* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
2101 |
|
|
* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
|
2102 |
|
|
* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
|
2103 |
|
|
* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
|
2104 |
|
|
* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
|
2105 |
|
|
* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
|
2106 |
|
|
* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
|
2107 |
|
|
* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
|
2108 |
|
|
* VERSION:: VERSION Command
|
2109 |
|
|
* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
2110 |
|
|
* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
|
2111 |
|
|
|
2112 |
|
|
|
2113 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Basic Script Concepts, Next: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
2114 |
|
|
|
2115 |
|
|
3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
2116 |
|
|
================================
|
2117 |
|
|
|
2118 |
|
|
We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
|
2119 |
|
|
describe the linker script language.
|
2120 |
|
|
|
2121 |
|
|
The linker combines input files into a single output file. The
|
2122 |
|
|
output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
|
2123 |
|
|
"object file format". Each file is called an "object file". The
|
2124 |
|
|
output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
|
2125 |
|
|
will also call it an object file. Each object file has, among other
|
2126 |
|
|
things, a list of "sections". We sometimes refer to a section in an
|
2127 |
|
|
input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
|
2128 |
|
|
file is an "output section".
|
2129 |
|
|
|
2130 |
|
|
Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
|
2131 |
|
|
also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
|
2132 |
|
|
A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
|
2133 |
|
|
should be loaded into memory when the output file is run. A section
|
2134 |
|
|
with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
|
2135 |
|
|
memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
|
2136 |
|
|
there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section which
|
2137 |
|
|
is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
|
2138 |
|
|
debugging information.
|
2139 |
|
|
|
2140 |
|
|
Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
|
2141 |
|
|
first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address. This is the address the
|
2142 |
|
|
section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
|
2143 |
|
|
"LMA", or load memory address. This is the address at which the
|
2144 |
|
|
section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
|
2145 |
|
|
same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
|
2146 |
|
|
is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
|
2147 |
|
|
(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
|
2148 |
|
|
based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
|
2149 |
|
|
RAM address would be the VMA.
|
2150 |
|
|
|
2151 |
|
|
You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
|
2152 |
|
|
program with the `-h' option.
|
2153 |
|
|
|
2154 |
|
|
Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
|
2155 |
|
|
table". A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol has a name,
|
2156 |
|
|
and each defined symbol has an address, among other information. If
|
2157 |
|
|
you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
|
2158 |
|
|
defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
|
2159 |
|
|
variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
|
2160 |
|
|
referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
|
2161 |
|
|
|
2162 |
|
|
You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
|
2163 |
|
|
or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
|
2164 |
|
|
|
2165 |
|
|
|
2166 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Script Format, Next: Simple Example, Prev: Basic Script Concepts, Up: Scripts
|
2167 |
|
|
|
2168 |
|
|
3.2 Linker Script Format
|
2169 |
|
|
========================
|
2170 |
|
|
|
2171 |
|
|
Linker scripts are text files.
|
2172 |
|
|
|
2173 |
|
|
You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
|
2174 |
|
|
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
|
2175 |
|
|
symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
|
2176 |
|
|
generally ignored.
|
2177 |
|
|
|
2178 |
|
|
Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
|
2179 |
|
|
directly. If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
|
2180 |
|
|
would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
|
2181 |
|
|
in double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
|
2182 |
|
|
file name.
|
2183 |
|
|
|
2184 |
|
|
You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
|
2185 |
|
|
`/*' and `*/'. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
|
2186 |
|
|
whitespace.
|
2187 |
|
|
|
2188 |
|
|
|
2189 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Example, Next: Simple Commands, Prev: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
2190 |
|
|
|
2191 |
|
|
3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
|
2192 |
|
|
================================
|
2193 |
|
|
|
2194 |
|
|
Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
|
2195 |
|
|
|
2196 |
|
|
The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
|
2197 |
|
|
`SECTIONS'. You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
|
2198 |
|
|
layout of the output file.
|
2199 |
|
|
|
2200 |
|
|
The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command. Here we will describe
|
2201 |
|
|
a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of code,
|
2202 |
|
|
initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
|
2203 |
|
|
`.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively. Let's assume
|
2204 |
|
|
further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
|
2205 |
|
|
files.
|
2206 |
|
|
|
2207 |
|
|
For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
|
2208 |
|
|
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
|
2209 |
|
|
linker script which will do that:
|
2210 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2211 |
|
|
{
|
2212 |
|
|
. = 0x10000;
|
2213 |
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
2214 |
|
|
. = 0x8000000;
|
2215 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
2216 |
|
|
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
2217 |
|
|
}
|
2218 |
|
|
|
2219 |
|
|
You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
|
2220 |
|
|
by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
|
2221 |
|
|
enclosed in curly braces.
|
2222 |
|
|
|
2223 |
|
|
The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
|
2224 |
|
|
sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
|
2225 |
|
|
counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
|
2226 |
|
|
other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
|
2227 |
|
|
current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
|
2228 |
|
|
incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
|
2229 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
|
2230 |
|
|
|
2231 |
|
|
The second line defines an output section, `.text'. The colon is
|
2232 |
|
|
required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
|
2233 |
|
|
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
|
2234 |
|
|
which should be placed into this output section. The `*' is a wildcard
|
2235 |
|
|
which matches any file name. The expression `*(.text)' means all
|
2236 |
|
|
`.text' input sections in all input files.
|
2237 |
|
|
|
2238 |
|
|
Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
|
2239 |
|
|
`.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
|
2240 |
|
|
section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
|
2241 |
|
|
|
2242 |
|
|
The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
|
2243 |
|
|
output file. The linker will place the `.data' output section at
|
2244 |
|
|
address `0x8000000'. After the linker places the `.data' output
|
2245 |
|
|
section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
|
2246 |
|
|
size of the `.data' output section. The effect is that the linker will
|
2247 |
|
|
place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
|
2248 |
|
|
section in memory.
|
2249 |
|
|
|
2250 |
|
|
The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
|
2251 |
|
|
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
|
2252 |
|
|
example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
|
2253 |
|
|
will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
|
2254 |
|
|
have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
|
2255 |
|
|
|
2256 |
|
|
That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
|
2257 |
|
|
|
2258 |
|
|
|
2259 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Commands, Next: Assignments, Prev: Simple Example, Up: Scripts
|
2260 |
|
|
|
2261 |
|
|
3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
|
2262 |
|
|
=================================
|
2263 |
|
|
|
2264 |
|
|
In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
|
2265 |
|
|
|
2266 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2267 |
|
|
|
2268 |
|
|
* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
|
2269 |
|
|
* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
|
2270 |
|
|
|
2271 |
|
|
* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
|
2272 |
|
|
|
2273 |
|
|
* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
|
2274 |
|
|
* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
|
2275 |
|
|
|
2276 |
|
|
|
2277 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Entry Point, Next: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
2278 |
|
|
|
2279 |
|
|
3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
|
2280 |
|
|
-----------------------------
|
2281 |
|
|
|
2282 |
|
|
The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
|
2283 |
|
|
point". You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
|
2284 |
|
|
point. The argument is a symbol name:
|
2285 |
|
|
ENTRY(SYMBOL)
|
2286 |
|
|
|
2287 |
|
|
There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set
|
2288 |
|
|
the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
|
2289 |
|
|
stopping when one of them succeeds:
|
2290 |
|
|
* the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
|
2291 |
|
|
|
2292 |
|
|
* the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
|
2293 |
|
|
|
2294 |
|
|
* the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
|
2295 |
|
|
|
2296 |
|
|
* the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
|
2297 |
|
|
|
2298 |
|
|
* The address `0'.
|
2299 |
|
|
|
2300 |
|
|
|
2301 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: File Commands, Next: Format Commands, Prev: Entry Point, Up: Simple Commands
|
2302 |
|
|
|
2303 |
|
|
3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
|
2304 |
|
|
---------------------------------
|
2305 |
|
|
|
2306 |
|
|
Several linker script commands deal with files.
|
2307 |
|
|
|
2308 |
|
|
`INCLUDE FILENAME'
|
2309 |
|
|
Include the linker script FILENAME at this point. The file will
|
2310 |
|
|
be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
|
2311 |
|
|
specified with the `-L' option. You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
|
2312 |
|
|
up to 10 levels deep.
|
2313 |
|
|
|
2314 |
|
|
You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
|
2315 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
|
2316 |
|
|
|
2317 |
|
|
`INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
2318 |
|
|
`INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
|
2319 |
|
|
The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
|
2320 |
|
|
in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
|
2321 |
|
|
|
2322 |
|
|
For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
|
2323 |
|
|
a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
|
2324 |
|
|
line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
|
2325 |
|
|
|
2326 |
|
|
In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
|
2327 |
|
|
linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
|
2328 |
|
|
option.
|
2329 |
|
|
|
2330 |
|
|
In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
|
2331 |
|
|
with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
|
2332 |
|
|
inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
|
2333 |
|
|
the "sysroot prefix". Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
|
2334 |
|
|
file in the current directory. If it is not found, the linker
|
2335 |
|
|
will search through the archive library search path. See the
|
2336 |
|
|
description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
|
2337 |
|
|
|
2338 |
|
|
If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
|
2339 |
|
|
`libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
|
2340 |
|
|
|
2341 |
|
|
When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
|
2342 |
|
|
files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
|
2343 |
|
|
script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
|
2344 |
|
|
|
2345 |
|
|
`GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
2346 |
|
|
`GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
|
2347 |
|
|
The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
|
2348 |
|
|
should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
|
2349 |
|
|
new undefined references are created. See the description of `-('
|
2350 |
|
|
in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
|
2351 |
|
|
|
2352 |
|
|
`AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
2353 |
|
|
`AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
|
2354 |
|
|
This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
|
2355 |
|
|
commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
|
2356 |
|
|
as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
|
2357 |
|
|
with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
|
2358 |
|
|
when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
|
2359 |
|
|
`--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
|
2360 |
|
|
restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
|
2361 |
|
|
afterwards.
|
2362 |
|
|
|
2363 |
|
|
`OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
|
2364 |
|
|
The `OUTPUT' command names the output file. Using
|
2365 |
|
|
`OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
|
2366 |
|
|
FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
|
2367 |
|
|
Options.). If both are used, the command line option takes
|
2368 |
|
|
precedence.
|
2369 |
|
|
|
2370 |
|
|
You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
|
2371 |
|
|
output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
|
2372 |
|
|
|
2373 |
|
|
`SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
|
2374 |
|
|
The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
|
2375 |
|
|
looks for archive libraries. Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
|
2376 |
|
|
like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
|
2377 |
|
|
Options: Options.). If both are used, then the linker will search
|
2378 |
|
|
both paths. Paths specified using the command line option are
|
2379 |
|
|
searched first.
|
2380 |
|
|
|
2381 |
|
|
`STARTUP(FILENAME)'
|
2382 |
|
|
The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
|
2383 |
|
|
that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
|
2384 |
|
|
though it were specified first on the command line. This may be
|
2385 |
|
|
useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
|
2386 |
|
|
start of the first file.
|
2387 |
|
|
|
2388 |
|
|
|
2389 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Format Commands, Next: REGION_ALIAS, Prev: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
2390 |
|
|
|
2391 |
|
|
3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
|
2392 |
|
|
-----------------------------------------------
|
2393 |
|
|
|
2394 |
|
|
A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
|
2395 |
|
|
|
2396 |
|
|
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
|
2397 |
|
|
`OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
|
2398 |
|
|
The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
|
2399 |
|
|
output file (*note BFD::). Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
|
2400 |
|
|
exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
2401 |
|
|
Command Line Options: Options.). If both are used, the command
|
2402 |
|
|
line option takes precedence.
|
2403 |
|
|
|
2404 |
|
|
You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
|
2405 |
|
|
formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options. This
|
2406 |
|
|
permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
|
2407 |
|
|
desired endianness.
|
2408 |
|
|
|
2409 |
|
|
If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
|
2410 |
|
|
be the first argument, DEFAULT. If `-EB' is used, the output
|
2411 |
|
|
format will be the second argument, BIG. If `-EL' is used, the
|
2412 |
|
|
output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
|
2413 |
|
|
|
2414 |
|
|
For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
|
2415 |
|
|
uses this command:
|
2416 |
|
|
OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
|
2417 |
|
|
This says that the default format for the output file is
|
2418 |
|
|
`elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
|
2419 |
|
|
option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
|
2420 |
|
|
format.
|
2421 |
|
|
|
2422 |
|
|
`TARGET(BFDNAME)'
|
2423 |
|
|
The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
|
2424 |
|
|
files. It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands. This
|
2425 |
|
|
command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
2426 |
|
|
Command Line Options: Options.). If the `TARGET' command is used
|
2427 |
|
|
but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
|
2428 |
|
|
used to set the format for the output file. *Note BFD::.
|
2429 |
|
|
|
2430 |
|
|
|
2431 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: REGION_ALIAS, Next: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: Format Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
2432 |
|
|
|
2433 |
|
|
3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
|
2434 |
|
|
------------------------------------------
|
2435 |
|
|
|
2436 |
|
|
Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
|
2437 |
|
|
*Note MEMORY:: command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory
|
2438 |
|
|
region.
|
2439 |
|
|
|
2440 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
|
2441 |
|
|
|
2442 |
|
|
The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
|
2443 |
|
|
memory region REGION. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
|
2444 |
|
|
to memory regions. An example follows.
|
2445 |
|
|
|
2446 |
|
|
Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
|
2447 |
|
|
various memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile
|
2448 |
|
|
memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have
|
2449 |
|
|
a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
|
2450 |
|
|
read-only data access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
|
2451 |
|
|
memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
|
2452 |
|
|
capability. We have four output sections:
|
2453 |
|
|
|
2454 |
|
|
* `.text' program code;
|
2455 |
|
|
|
2456 |
|
|
* `.rodata' read-only data;
|
2457 |
|
|
|
2458 |
|
|
* `.data' read-write initialized data;
|
2459 |
|
|
|
2460 |
|
|
* `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
|
2461 |
|
|
|
2462 |
|
|
The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
|
2463 |
|
|
independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
|
2464 |
|
|
part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
|
2465 |
|
|
system. Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
|
2466 |
|
|
`A', `B' and `C':
|
2467 |
|
|
Section Variant A Variant B Variant C
|
2468 |
|
|
.text RAM ROM ROM
|
2469 |
|
|
.rodata RAM ROM ROM2
|
2470 |
|
|
.data RAM RAM/ROM RAM/ROM2
|
2471 |
|
|
.bss RAM RAM RAM
|
2472 |
|
|
The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
|
2473 |
|
|
loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively. Please note that the
|
2474 |
|
|
load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
|
2475 |
|
|
end of the `.rodata' section.
|
2476 |
|
|
|
2477 |
|
|
The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
|
2478 |
|
|
It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
|
2479 |
|
|
the memory layout:
|
2480 |
|
|
INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
|
2481 |
|
|
|
2482 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2483 |
|
|
{
|
2484 |
|
|
.text :
|
2485 |
|
|
{
|
2486 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
2487 |
|
|
} > REGION_TEXT
|
2488 |
|
|
.rodata :
|
2489 |
|
|
{
|
2490 |
|
|
*(.rodata)
|
2491 |
|
|
rodata_end = .;
|
2492 |
|
|
} > REGION_RODATA
|
2493 |
|
|
.data : AT (rodata_end)
|
2494 |
|
|
{
|
2495 |
|
|
data_start = .;
|
2496 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
2497 |
|
|
} > REGION_DATA
|
2498 |
|
|
data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
|
2499 |
|
|
data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
|
2500 |
|
|
.bss :
|
2501 |
|
|
{
|
2502 |
|
|
*(.bss)
|
2503 |
|
|
} > REGION_BSS
|
2504 |
|
|
}
|
2505 |
|
|
|
2506 |
|
|
Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
|
2507 |
|
|
regions and alias names. The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
|
2508 |
|
|
variants `A', `B' and `C':
|
2509 |
|
|
`A'
|
2510 |
|
|
Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
|
2511 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
2512 |
|
|
{
|
2513 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
|
2514 |
|
|
}
|
2515 |
|
|
|
2516 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
|
2517 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
|
2518 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
2519 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
2520 |
|
|
|
2521 |
|
|
`B'
|
2522 |
|
|
Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'. Read-write
|
2523 |
|
|
data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the initialized data is
|
2524 |
|
|
loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
|
2525 |
|
|
the `RAM'.
|
2526 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
2527 |
|
|
{
|
2528 |
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
|
2529 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
2530 |
|
|
}
|
2531 |
|
|
|
2532 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
2533 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
|
2534 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
2535 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
2536 |
|
|
|
2537 |
|
|
`C'
|
2538 |
|
|
Program code goes into the `ROM'. Read-only data goes into the
|
2539 |
|
|
`ROM2'. Read-write data goes into the `RAM'. An image of the
|
2540 |
|
|
initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
|
2541 |
|
|
during system start into the `RAM'.
|
2542 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
2543 |
|
|
{
|
2544 |
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
|
2545 |
|
|
ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
2546 |
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
2547 |
|
|
}
|
2548 |
|
|
|
2549 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
2550 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
|
2551 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
2552 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
2553 |
|
|
|
2554 |
|
|
It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
|
2555 |
|
|
copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
|
2556 |
|
|
necessary:
|
2557 |
|
|
#include
|
2558 |
|
|
|
2559 |
|
|
extern char data_start [];
|
2560 |
|
|
extern char data_size [];
|
2561 |
|
|
extern char data_load_start [];
|
2562 |
|
|
|
2563 |
|
|
void copy_data(void)
|
2564 |
|
|
{
|
2565 |
|
|
if (data_start != data_load_start)
|
2566 |
|
|
{
|
2567 |
|
|
memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
|
2568 |
|
|
}
|
2569 |
|
|
}
|
2570 |
|
|
|
2571 |
|
|
|
2572 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: REGION_ALIAS, Up: Simple Commands
|
2573 |
|
|
|
2574 |
|
|
3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
|
2575 |
|
|
----------------------------------
|
2576 |
|
|
|
2577 |
|
|
There are a few other linker scripts commands.
|
2578 |
|
|
|
2579 |
|
|
`ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
|
2580 |
|
|
Ensure that EXP is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
|
2581 |
|
|
with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
|
2582 |
|
|
|
2583 |
|
|
`EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
|
2584 |
|
|
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
2585 |
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
2586 |
|
|
modules from standard libraries. You may list several SYMBOLs for
|
2587 |
|
|
each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times. This
|
2588 |
|
|
command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
|
2589 |
|
|
|
2590 |
|
|
`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
2591 |
|
|
This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
|
2592 |
|
|
to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
|
2593 |
|
|
output file is specified (`-r').
|
2594 |
|
|
|
2595 |
|
|
`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
2596 |
|
|
This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
|
2597 |
|
|
command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
|
2598 |
|
|
to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
|
2599 |
|
|
|
2600 |
|
|
`INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
|
2601 |
|
|
This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
|
2602 |
|
|
augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays. It
|
2603 |
|
|
inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
|
2604 |
|
|
OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
|
2605 |
|
|
linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
|
2606 |
|
|
sections. *Note Location Counter::. The insertion happens after
|
2607 |
|
|
the linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to
|
2608 |
|
|
the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
|
2609 |
|
|
linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
|
2610 |
|
|
default linker script statements in the internal linker
|
2611 |
|
|
representation of the script. In particular, input section
|
2612 |
|
|
assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
|
2613 |
|
|
the default script. Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
|
2614 |
|
|
`INSERT' might look:
|
2615 |
|
|
|
2616 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2617 |
|
|
{
|
2618 |
|
|
OVERLAY :
|
2619 |
|
|
{
|
2620 |
|
|
.ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
|
2621 |
|
|
.ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
|
2622 |
|
|
}
|
2623 |
|
|
}
|
2624 |
|
|
INSERT AFTER .text;
|
2625 |
|
|
|
2626 |
|
|
`NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
|
2627 |
|
|
This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
|
2628 |
|
|
references among certain output sections.
|
2629 |
|
|
|
2630 |
|
|
In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
|
2631 |
|
|
using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
|
2632 |
|
|
section will not be. Any direct references between the two
|
2633 |
|
|
sections would be errors. For example, it would be an error if
|
2634 |
|
|
code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
|
2635 |
|
|
|
2636 |
|
|
The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names. If
|
2637 |
|
|
`ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
|
2638 |
|
|
an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
|
2639 |
|
|
`NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
|
2640 |
|
|
names.
|
2641 |
|
|
|
2642 |
|
|
`OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
|
2643 |
|
|
Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is
|
2644 |
|
|
one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::). You can
|
2645 |
|
|
see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
|
2646 |
|
|
program with the `-f' option.
|
2647 |
|
|
|
2648 |
|
|
|
2649 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Assignments, Next: SECTIONS, Prev: Simple Commands, Up: Scripts
|
2650 |
|
|
|
2651 |
|
|
3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
|
2652 |
|
|
===============================
|
2653 |
|
|
|
2654 |
|
|
You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
|
2655 |
|
|
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
|
2656 |
|
|
|
2657 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2658 |
|
|
|
2659 |
|
|
* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
|
2660 |
|
|
* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
|
2661 |
|
|
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
2662 |
|
|
* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
|
2663 |
|
|
|
2664 |
|
|
|
2665 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Assignments, Next: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments
|
2666 |
|
|
|
2667 |
|
|
3.5.1 Simple Assignments
|
2668 |
|
|
------------------------
|
2669 |
|
|
|
2670 |
|
|
You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
|
2671 |
|
|
|
2672 |
|
|
`SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
|
2673 |
|
|
`SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
|
2674 |
|
|
`SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2675 |
|
|
`SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2676 |
|
|
`SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2677 |
|
|
`SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2678 |
|
|
`SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2679 |
|
|
`SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2680 |
|
|
`SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
|
2681 |
|
|
|
2682 |
|
|
The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION. In
|
2683 |
|
|
the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
|
2684 |
|
|
adjusted accordingly.
|
2685 |
|
|
|
2686 |
|
|
The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter. You may
|
2687 |
|
|
only use this within a `SECTIONS' command. *Note Location Counter::.
|
2688 |
|
|
|
2689 |
|
|
The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
|
2690 |
|
|
|
2691 |
|
|
Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
|
2692 |
|
|
|
2693 |
|
|
You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
|
2694 |
|
|
as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
|
2695 |
|
|
section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
|
2696 |
|
|
|
2697 |
|
|
The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
|
2698 |
|
|
expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
|
2699 |
|
|
|
2700 |
|
|
Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
|
2701 |
|
|
assignments may be used:
|
2702 |
|
|
|
2703 |
|
|
floating_point = 0;
|
2704 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2705 |
|
|
{
|
2706 |
|
|
.text :
|
2707 |
|
|
{
|
2708 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
2709 |
|
|
_etext = .;
|
2710 |
|
|
}
|
2711 |
|
|
_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
|
2712 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
2713 |
|
|
}
|
2714 |
|
|
In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
|
2715 |
|
|
zero. The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
|
2716 |
|
|
last `.text' input section. The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
|
2717 |
|
|
address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
|
2718 |
|
|
boundary.
|
2719 |
|
|
|
2720 |
|
|
|
2721 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE, Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Prev: Simple Assignments, Up: Assignments
|
2722 |
|
|
|
2723 |
|
|
3.5.2 PROVIDE
|
2724 |
|
|
-------------
|
2725 |
|
|
|
2726 |
|
|
In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
|
2727 |
|
|
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
|
2728 |
|
|
the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
|
2729 |
|
|
However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
|
2730 |
|
|
function name without encountering an error. The `PROVIDE' keyword may
|
2731 |
|
|
be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
|
2732 |
|
|
but not defined. The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
|
2733 |
|
|
|
2734 |
|
|
Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
|
2735 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2736 |
|
|
{
|
2737 |
|
|
.text :
|
2738 |
|
|
{
|
2739 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
2740 |
|
|
_etext = .;
|
2741 |
|
|
PROVIDE(etext = .);
|
2742 |
|
|
}
|
2743 |
|
|
}
|
2744 |
|
|
|
2745 |
|
|
In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
|
2746 |
|
|
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
|
2747 |
|
|
the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
|
2748 |
|
|
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
|
2749 |
|
|
If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
|
2750 |
|
|
will use the definition in the linker script.
|
2751 |
|
|
|
2752 |
|
|
|
2753 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Next: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments
|
2754 |
|
|
|
2755 |
|
|
3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
2756 |
|
|
--------------------
|
2757 |
|
|
|
2758 |
|
|
Similar to `PROVIDE'. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
|
2759 |
|
|
hidden and won't be exported.
|
2760 |
|
|
|
2761 |
|
|
|
2762 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
2763 |
|
|
|
2764 |
|
|
3.5.4 Source Code Reference
|
2765 |
|
|
---------------------------
|
2766 |
|
|
|
2767 |
|
|
Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
|
2768 |
|
|
intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
|
2769 |
|
|
variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
|
2770 |
|
|
that does not have a value.
|
2771 |
|
|
|
2772 |
|
|
Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
|
2773 |
|
|
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
|
2774 |
|
|
stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
|
2775 |
|
|
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
|
2776 |
|
|
mangling'. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
|
2777 |
|
|
a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
|
2778 |
|
|
variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
|
2779 |
|
|
linker script variable might be referred to as:
|
2780 |
|
|
|
2781 |
|
|
extern int foo;
|
2782 |
|
|
|
2783 |
|
|
But in the linker script it might be defined as:
|
2784 |
|
|
|
2785 |
|
|
_foo = 1000;
|
2786 |
|
|
|
2787 |
|
|
In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
|
2788 |
|
|
transformation has taken place.
|
2789 |
|
|
|
2790 |
|
|
When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
|
2791 |
|
|
things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
|
2792 |
|
|
the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol. The second is
|
2793 |
|
|
that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
|
2794 |
|
|
holds the symbol's _address_. ie the symbol table contains the address
|
2795 |
|
|
of the block of memory holding the symbol's value. So for example the
|
2796 |
|
|
following C declaration, at file scope:
|
2797 |
|
|
|
2798 |
|
|
int foo = 1000;
|
2799 |
|
|
|
2800 |
|
|
creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table. This entry holds
|
2801 |
|
|
the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
|
2802 |
|
|
initially stored.
|
2803 |
|
|
|
2804 |
|
|
When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
|
2805 |
|
|
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
|
2806 |
|
|
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
|
2807 |
|
|
So:
|
2808 |
|
|
|
2809 |
|
|
foo = 1;
|
2810 |
|
|
|
2811 |
|
|
looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
|
2812 |
|
|
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
|
2813 |
|
|
address. Whereas:
|
2814 |
|
|
|
2815 |
|
|
int * a = & foo;
|
2816 |
|
|
|
2817 |
|
|
looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
|
2818 |
|
|
then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
|
2819 |
|
|
variable `a'.
|
2820 |
|
|
|
2821 |
|
|
Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
|
2822 |
|
|
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
|
2823 |
|
|
an address without a value. So for example the linker script
|
2824 |
|
|
definition:
|
2825 |
|
|
|
2826 |
|
|
foo = 1000;
|
2827 |
|
|
|
2828 |
|
|
creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
|
2829 |
|
|
address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
|
2830 |
|
|
address 1000. This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
|
2831 |
|
|
linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
|
2832 |
|
|
access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
|
2833 |
|
|
|
2834 |
|
|
Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
|
2835 |
|
|
code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
|
2836 |
|
|
attempt to use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the
|
2837 |
|
|
contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
|
2838 |
|
|
.FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
|
2839 |
|
|
|
2840 |
|
|
start_of_ROM = .ROM;
|
2841 |
|
|
end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
|
2842 |
|
|
start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
|
2843 |
|
|
|
2844 |
|
|
Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
|
2845 |
|
|
|
2846 |
|
|
extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
|
2847 |
|
|
|
2848 |
|
|
memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
|
2849 |
|
|
|
2850 |
|
|
Note the use of the `&' operators. These are correct.
|
2851 |
|
|
|
2852 |
|
|
|
2853 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: SECTIONS, Next: MEMORY, Prev: Assignments, Up: Scripts
|
2854 |
|
|
|
2855 |
|
|
3.6 SECTIONS Command
|
2856 |
|
|
====================
|
2857 |
|
|
|
2858 |
|
|
The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
|
2859 |
|
|
output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
|
2860 |
|
|
|
2861 |
|
|
The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
|
2862 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
2863 |
|
|
{
|
2864 |
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
2865 |
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
2866 |
|
|
...
|
2867 |
|
|
}
|
2868 |
|
|
|
2869 |
|
|
Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
|
2870 |
|
|
|
2871 |
|
|
* an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
|
2872 |
|
|
|
2873 |
|
|
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
2874 |
|
|
|
2875 |
|
|
* an output section description
|
2876 |
|
|
|
2877 |
|
|
* an overlay description
|
2878 |
|
|
|
2879 |
|
|
The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
|
2880 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
|
2881 |
|
|
those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
|
2882 |
|
|
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
|
2883 |
|
|
the layout of the output file.
|
2884 |
|
|
|
2885 |
|
|
Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
|
2886 |
|
|
below.
|
2887 |
|
|
|
2888 |
|
|
If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
|
2889 |
|
|
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
|
2890 |
|
|
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
|
2891 |
|
|
input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
|
2892 |
|
|
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
|
2893 |
|
|
in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
|
2894 |
|
|
|
2895 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
2896 |
|
|
|
2897 |
|
|
* Output Section Description:: Output section description
|
2898 |
|
|
* Output Section Name:: Output section name
|
2899 |
|
|
* Output Section Address:: Output section address
|
2900 |
|
|
* Input Section:: Input section description
|
2901 |
|
|
* Output Section Data:: Output section data
|
2902 |
|
|
* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
|
2903 |
|
|
* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
|
2904 |
|
|
* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
|
2905 |
|
|
* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
|
2906 |
|
|
|
2907 |
|
|
|
2908 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Description, Next: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
2909 |
|
|
|
2910 |
|
|
3.6.1 Output Section Description
|
2911 |
|
|
--------------------------------
|
2912 |
|
|
|
2913 |
|
|
The full description of an output section looks like this:
|
2914 |
|
|
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
2915 |
|
|
[AT(LMA)]
|
2916 |
|
|
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
|
2917 |
|
|
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
2918 |
|
|
[CONSTRAINT]
|
2919 |
|
|
{
|
2920 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
2921 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
2922 |
|
|
...
|
2923 |
|
|
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
|
2924 |
|
|
|
2925 |
|
|
Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
|
2926 |
|
|
attributes.
|
2927 |
|
|
|
2928 |
|
|
The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
|
2929 |
|
|
is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required. The
|
2930 |
|
|
line breaks and other white space are optional.
|
2931 |
|
|
|
2932 |
|
|
Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
|
2933 |
|
|
|
2934 |
|
|
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
2935 |
|
|
|
2936 |
|
|
* an input section description (*note Input Section::)
|
2937 |
|
|
|
2938 |
|
|
* data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
|
2939 |
|
|
|
2940 |
|
|
* a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
|
2941 |
|
|
|
2942 |
|
|
|
2943 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Name, Next: Output Section Address, Prev: Output Section Description, Up: SECTIONS
|
2944 |
|
|
|
2945 |
|
|
3.6.2 Output Section Name
|
2946 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
2947 |
|
|
|
2948 |
|
|
The name of the output section is SECTION. SECTION must meet the
|
2949 |
|
|
constraints of your output format. In formats which only support a
|
2950 |
|
|
limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
|
2951 |
|
|
the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
|
2952 |
|
|
`.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
|
2953 |
|
|
of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
|
2954 |
|
|
the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string. A section name
|
2955 |
|
|
may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
|
2956 |
|
|
any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
|
2957 |
|
|
|
2958 |
|
|
The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
|
2959 |
|
|
Discarding::.
|
2960 |
|
|
|
2961 |
|
|
|
2962 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Address, Next: Input Section, Prev: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
2963 |
|
|
|
2964 |
|
|
3.6.3 Output Section Address
|
2965 |
|
|
----------------------------
|
2966 |
|
|
|
2967 |
|
|
The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
|
2968 |
|
|
of the output section. If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
|
2969 |
|
|
set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
|
2970 |
|
|
value of the location counter.
|
2971 |
|
|
|
2972 |
|
|
If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
|
2973 |
|
|
set to precisely that. If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
|
2974 |
|
|
the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
|
2975 |
|
|
the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
|
2976 |
|
|
output section. The alignment requirement of the output section is the
|
2977 |
|
|
strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
|
2978 |
|
|
section.
|
2979 |
|
|
|
2980 |
|
|
For example,
|
2981 |
|
|
.text . : { *(.text) }
|
2982 |
|
|
and
|
2983 |
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
2984 |
|
|
are subtly different. The first will set the address of the `.text'
|
2985 |
|
|
output section to the current value of the location counter. The
|
2986 |
|
|
second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
|
2987 |
|
|
to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
|
2988 |
|
|
|
2989 |
|
|
The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
|
2990 |
|
|
For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
|
2991 |
|
|
so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
|
2992 |
|
|
do something like this:
|
2993 |
|
|
.text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
|
2994 |
|
|
This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
|
2995 |
|
|
aligned upward to the specified value.
|
2996 |
|
|
|
2997 |
|
|
Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
|
2998 |
|
|
location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
|
2999 |
|
|
sections are ignored).
|
3000 |
|
|
|
3001 |
|
|
|
3002 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section, Next: Output Section Data, Prev: Output Section Address, Up: SECTIONS
|
3003 |
|
|
|
3004 |
|
|
3.6.4 Input Section Description
|
3005 |
|
|
-------------------------------
|
3006 |
|
|
|
3007 |
|
|
The most common output section command is an input section description.
|
3008 |
|
|
|
3009 |
|
|
The input section description is the most basic linker script
|
3010 |
|
|
operation. You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
|
3011 |
|
|
your program in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the
|
3012 |
|
|
linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
|
3013 |
|
|
|
3014 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3015 |
|
|
|
3016 |
|
|
* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
|
3017 |
|
|
* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
|
3018 |
|
|
* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
|
3019 |
|
|
* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
|
3020 |
|
|
* Input Section Example:: Input section example
|
3021 |
|
|
|
3022 |
|
|
|
3023 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Basics, Next: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
3024 |
|
|
|
3025 |
|
|
3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
|
3026 |
|
|
............................
|
3027 |
|
|
|
3028 |
|
|
An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
|
3029 |
|
|
by a list of section names in parentheses.
|
3030 |
|
|
|
3031 |
|
|
The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
|
3032 |
|
|
describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
|
3033 |
|
|
|
3034 |
|
|
The most common input section description is to include all input
|
3035 |
|
|
sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
|
3036 |
|
|
include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
|
3037 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
3038 |
|
|
Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude
|
3039 |
|
|
a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
|
3040 |
|
|
be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
|
3041 |
|
|
EXCLUDE_FILE list. For example:
|
3042 |
|
|
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
|
3043 |
|
|
will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
|
3044 |
|
|
`otherfile.o' to be included.
|
3045 |
|
|
|
3046 |
|
|
There are two ways to include more than one section:
|
3047 |
|
|
*(.text .rdata)
|
3048 |
|
|
*(.text) *(.rdata)
|
3049 |
|
|
The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
|
3050 |
|
|
`.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section. In the
|
3051 |
|
|
first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
|
3052 |
|
|
they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all `.text'
|
3053 |
|
|
input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
|
3054 |
|
|
sections.
|
3055 |
|
|
|
3056 |
|
|
You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
|
3057 |
|
|
file. You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
|
3058 |
|
|
data that needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
|
3059 |
|
|
data.o(.data)
|
3060 |
|
|
|
3061 |
|
|
You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
|
3062 |
|
|
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
|
3063 |
|
|
no whitespace around the colon.
|
3064 |
|
|
|
3065 |
|
|
`archive:file'
|
3066 |
|
|
matches file within archive
|
3067 |
|
|
|
3068 |
|
|
`archive:'
|
3069 |
|
|
matches the whole archive
|
3070 |
|
|
|
3071 |
|
|
`:file'
|
3072 |
|
|
matches file but not one in an archive
|
3073 |
|
|
|
3074 |
|
|
Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
|
3075 |
|
|
wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
|
3076 |
|
|
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
|
3077 |
|
|
is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
|
3078 |
|
|
`c'. `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
|
3079 |
|
|
`EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
|
3080 |
|
|
contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
|
3081 |
|
|
using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
|
3082 |
|
|
|
3083 |
|
|
If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
|
3084 |
|
|
in the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
|
3085 |
|
|
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
|
3086 |
|
|
data.o
|
3087 |
|
|
|
3088 |
|
|
When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
|
3089 |
|
|
and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
|
3090 |
|
|
see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
|
3091 |
|
|
in an `INPUT' command. If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
|
3092 |
|
|
the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
|
3093 |
|
|
Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
|
3094 |
|
|
not search for the file in the archive search path.
|
3095 |
|
|
|
3096 |
|
|
|
3097 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Wildcards, Next: Input Section Common, Prev: Input Section Basics, Up: Input Section
|
3098 |
|
|
|
3099 |
|
|
3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
|
3100 |
|
|
.......................................
|
3101 |
|
|
|
3102 |
|
|
In an input section description, either the file name or the section
|
3103 |
|
|
name or both may be wildcard patterns.
|
3104 |
|
|
|
3105 |
|
|
The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
|
3106 |
|
|
pattern for the file name.
|
3107 |
|
|
|
3108 |
|
|
The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
|
3109 |
|
|
|
3110 |
|
|
`*'
|
3111 |
|
|
matches any number of characters
|
3112 |
|
|
|
3113 |
|
|
`?'
|
3114 |
|
|
matches any single character
|
3115 |
|
|
|
3116 |
|
|
`[CHARS]'
|
3117 |
|
|
matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
|
3118 |
|
|
may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
|
3119 |
|
|
match any lower case letter
|
3120 |
|
|
|
3121 |
|
|
`\'
|
3122 |
|
|
quotes the following character
|
3123 |
|
|
|
3124 |
|
|
When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
|
3125 |
|
|
will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
|
3126 |
|
|
Unix). A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
|
3127 |
|
|
it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
|
3128 |
|
|
In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
|
3129 |
|
|
|
3130 |
|
|
File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
|
3131 |
|
|
specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command. The linker
|
3132 |
|
|
does not search directories to expand wildcards.
|
3133 |
|
|
|
3134 |
|
|
If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
|
3135 |
|
|
name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
|
3136 |
|
|
linker will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
|
3137 |
|
|
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
|
3138 |
|
|
`data.o' rule will not be used:
|
3139 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
3140 |
|
|
.data1 : { data.o(.data) }
|
3141 |
|
|
|
3142 |
|
|
Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
|
3143 |
|
|
wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can
|
3144 |
|
|
change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
|
3145 |
|
|
wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)'). When
|
3146 |
|
|
the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
|
3147 |
|
|
sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
|
3148 |
|
|
file.
|
3149 |
|
|
|
3150 |
|
|
`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
|
3151 |
|
|
difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
|
3152 |
|
|
order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
|
3153 |
|
|
|
3154 |
|
|
`SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
|
3155 |
|
|
|
3156 |
|
|
When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
|
3157 |
|
|
there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
|
3158 |
|
|
|
3159 |
|
|
1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3160 |
|
|
It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
|
3161 |
|
|
if 2 sections have the same name.
|
3162 |
|
|
|
3163 |
|
|
2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3164 |
|
|
It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
|
3165 |
|
|
if 2 sections have the same alignment.
|
3166 |
|
|
|
3167 |
|
|
3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
|
3168 |
|
|
treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
|
3169 |
|
|
|
3170 |
|
|
4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
|
3171 |
|
|
pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
|
3172 |
|
|
section pattern).
|
3173 |
|
|
|
3174 |
|
|
5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
|
3175 |
|
|
|
3176 |
|
|
When both command line section sorting option and linker script
|
3177 |
|
|
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
|
3178 |
|
|
precedence over the command line option.
|
3179 |
|
|
|
3180 |
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
|
3181 |
|
|
command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
|
3182 |
|
|
as nested sorting command.
|
3183 |
|
|
|
3184 |
|
|
1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
|
3185 |
|
|
alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
|
3186 |
|
|
(wildcard section pattern)).
|
3187 |
|
|
|
3188 |
|
|
2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
|
3189 |
|
|
`--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
|
3190 |
|
|
(`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
3191 |
|
|
|
3192 |
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
|
3193 |
|
|
command line option will be ignored.
|
3194 |
|
|
|
3195 |
|
|
If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
|
3196 |
|
|
the `-M' linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
|
3197 |
|
|
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
|
3198 |
|
|
|
3199 |
|
|
This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
|
3200 |
|
|
files. This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
|
3201 |
|
|
sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'. The linker will
|
3202 |
|
|
place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
|
3203 |
|
|
character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
|
3204 |
|
|
`.data' section in `.data'.
|
3205 |
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
3206 |
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
3207 |
|
|
.DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
|
3208 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
3209 |
|
|
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
3210 |
|
|
}
|
3211 |
|
|
|
3212 |
|
|
|
3213 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Common, Next: Input Section Keep, Prev: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
3214 |
|
|
|
3215 |
|
|
3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
|
3216 |
|
|
........................................
|
3217 |
|
|
|
3218 |
|
|
A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
|
3219 |
|
|
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
|
3220 |
|
|
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
|
3221 |
|
|
named `COMMON'.
|
3222 |
|
|
|
3223 |
|
|
You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
|
3224 |
|
|
other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
|
3225 |
|
|
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
|
3226 |
|
|
input files are placed in another section.
|
3227 |
|
|
|
3228 |
|
|
In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
|
3229 |
|
|
`.bss' section in the output file. For example:
|
3230 |
|
|
.bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
|
3231 |
|
|
|
3232 |
|
|
Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
|
3233 |
|
|
For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
|
3234 |
|
|
common symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will
|
3235 |
|
|
use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
|
3236 |
|
|
In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
|
3237 |
|
|
symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols. This permits you to
|
3238 |
|
|
map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
|
3239 |
|
|
locations.
|
3240 |
|
|
|
3241 |
|
|
You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts. This
|
3242 |
|
|
notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
|
3243 |
|
|
|
3244 |
|
|
|
3245 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Keep, Next: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Common, Up: Input Section
|
3246 |
|
|
|
3247 |
|
|
3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
|
3248 |
|
|
............................................
|
3249 |
|
|
|
3250 |
|
|
When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
|
3251 |
|
|
often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated. This is
|
3252 |
|
|
accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
|
3253 |
|
|
`KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
|
3254 |
|
|
|
3255 |
|
|
|
3256 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Keep, Up: Input Section
|
3257 |
|
|
|
3258 |
|
|
3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
|
3259 |
|
|
.............................
|
3260 |
|
|
|
3261 |
|
|
The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
|
3262 |
|
|
to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
|
3263 |
|
|
start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
|
3264 |
|
|
All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
|
3265 |
|
|
same output section. All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
|
3266 |
|
|
output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
|
3267 |
|
|
All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
|
3268 |
|
|
are written to output section `outputc'.
|
3269 |
|
|
|
3270 |
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
3271 |
|
|
outputa 0x10000 :
|
3272 |
|
|
{
|
3273 |
|
|
all.o
|
3274 |
|
|
foo.o (.input1)
|
3275 |
|
|
}
|
3276 |
|
|
outputb :
|
3277 |
|
|
{
|
3278 |
|
|
foo.o (.input2)
|
3279 |
|
|
foo1.o (.input1)
|
3280 |
|
|
}
|
3281 |
|
|
outputc :
|
3282 |
|
|
{
|
3283 |
|
|
*(.input1)
|
3284 |
|
|
*(.input2)
|
3285 |
|
|
}
|
3286 |
|
|
}
|
3287 |
|
|
|
3288 |
|
|
|
3289 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Data, Next: Output Section Keywords, Prev: Input Section, Up: SECTIONS
|
3290 |
|
|
|
3291 |
|
|
3.6.5 Output Section Data
|
3292 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
3293 |
|
|
|
3294 |
|
|
You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
|
3295 |
|
|
`BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
|
3296 |
|
|
command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
|
3297 |
|
|
providing the value to store (*note Expressions::). The value of the
|
3298 |
|
|
expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
|
3299 |
|
|
|
3300 |
|
|
The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
|
3301 |
|
|
four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the bytes, the
|
3302 |
|
|
location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
|
3303 |
|
|
|
3304 |
|
|
For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
|
3305 |
|
|
value of the symbol `addr':
|
3306 |
|
|
BYTE(1)
|
3307 |
|
|
LONG(addr)
|
3308 |
|
|
|
3309 |
|
|
When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
|
3310 |
|
|
they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and target
|
3311 |
|
|
are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case `QUAD'
|
3312 |
|
|
stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
|
3313 |
|
|
bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
|
3314 |
|
|
|
3315 |
|
|
If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
|
3316 |
|
|
endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
|
3317 |
|
|
endianness. When the object file format does not have an explicit
|
3318 |
|
|
endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
|
3319 |
|
|
stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
|
3320 |
|
|
|
3321 |
|
|
Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
|
3322 |
|
|
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
|
3323 |
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
|
3324 |
|
|
whereas this will work:
|
3325 |
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
|
3326 |
|
|
|
3327 |
|
|
You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
|
3328 |
|
|
current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
|
3329 |
|
|
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
|
3330 |
|
|
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
|
3331 |
|
|
with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary. A `FILL'
|
3332 |
|
|
statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
|
3333 |
|
|
the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
|
3334 |
|
|
you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
|
3335 |
|
|
section.
|
3336 |
|
|
|
3337 |
|
|
This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
|
3338 |
|
|
value `0x90':
|
3339 |
|
|
FILL(0x90909090)
|
3340 |
|
|
|
3341 |
|
|
The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
|
3342 |
|
|
attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
|
3343 |
|
|
`FILL' command, rather than the entire section. If both are used, the
|
3344 |
|
|
`FILL' command takes precedence. *Note Output Section Fill::, for
|
3345 |
|
|
details on the fill expression.
|
3346 |
|
|
|
3347 |
|
|
|
3348 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Keywords, Next: Output Section Discarding, Prev: Output Section Data, Up: SECTIONS
|
3349 |
|
|
|
3350 |
|
|
3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
|
3351 |
|
|
-----------------------------
|
3352 |
|
|
|
3353 |
|
|
There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
|
3354 |
|
|
commands.
|
3355 |
|
|
|
3356 |
|
|
`CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
|
3357 |
|
|
The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
|
3358 |
|
|
file. The name of each symbol will be the name of the
|
3359 |
|
|
corresponding input file. The section of each symbol will be the
|
3360 |
|
|
output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
|
3361 |
|
|
appears.
|
3362 |
|
|
|
3363 |
|
|
This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
|
3364 |
|
|
normally used for any other object file format.
|
3365 |
|
|
|
3366 |
|
|
`CONSTRUCTORS'
|
3367 |
|
|
When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
|
3368 |
|
|
unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
|
3369 |
|
|
destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
|
3370 |
|
|
arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
|
3371 |
|
|
automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
|
3372 |
|
|
name. For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
|
3373 |
|
|
tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
|
3374 |
|
|
section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears. The
|
3375 |
|
|
`CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
|
3376 |
|
|
|
3377 |
|
|
The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
|
3378 |
|
|
constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
|
3379 |
|
|
Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
|
3380 |
|
|
end of the global destructors. The first word in the list is the
|
3381 |
|
|
number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
|
3382 |
|
|
destructor, followed by a zero word. The compiler must arrange to
|
3383 |
|
|
actually run the code. For these object file formats GNU C++
|
3384 |
|
|
normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
|
3385 |
|
|
`__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
|
3386 |
|
|
`main'. GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
|
3387 |
|
|
`atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
|
3388 |
|
|
|
3389 |
|
|
For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
|
3390 |
|
|
arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
|
3391 |
|
|
addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
|
3392 |
|
|
and `.dtors' sections. Placing the following sequence into your
|
3393 |
|
|
linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
|
3394 |
|
|
runtime code expects to see.
|
3395 |
|
|
|
3396 |
|
|
__CTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
3397 |
|
|
LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
3398 |
|
|
*(.ctors)
|
3399 |
|
|
LONG(0)
|
3400 |
|
|
__CTOR_END__ = .;
|
3401 |
|
|
__DTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
3402 |
|
|
LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
3403 |
|
|
*(.dtors)
|
3404 |
|
|
LONG(0)
|
3405 |
|
|
__DTOR_END__ = .;
|
3406 |
|
|
|
3407 |
|
|
If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
|
3408 |
|
|
which provides some control over the order in which global
|
3409 |
|
|
constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
|
3410 |
|
|
to ensure that they are executed in the correct order. When using
|
3411 |
|
|
the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
|
3412 |
|
|
instead. When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
|
3413 |
|
|
`*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
|
3414 |
|
|
just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
|
3415 |
|
|
|
3416 |
|
|
Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
|
3417 |
|
|
automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
|
3418 |
|
|
them. However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
|
3419 |
|
|
and writing your own linker scripts.
|
3420 |
|
|
|
3421 |
|
|
|
3422 |
|
|
|
3423 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Discarding, Next: Output Section Attributes, Prev: Output Section Keywords, Up: SECTIONS
|
3424 |
|
|
|
3425 |
|
|
3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
|
3426 |
|
|
-------------------------------
|
3427 |
|
|
|
3428 |
|
|
The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
|
3429 |
|
|
for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
|
3430 |
|
|
present in any of the input files. For example:
|
3431 |
|
|
.foo : { *(.foo) }
|
3432 |
|
|
will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
|
3433 |
|
|
`.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
|
3434 |
|
|
are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate space in
|
3435 |
|
|
an output section will also create the output section.
|
3436 |
|
|
|
3437 |
|
|
The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
|
3438 |
|
|
Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
|
3439 |
|
|
defines symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will
|
3440 |
|
|
obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
|
3441 |
|
|
section is discarded.
|
3442 |
|
|
|
3443 |
|
|
The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
|
3444 |
|
|
input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
|
3445 |
|
|
section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
|
3446 |
|
|
|
3447 |
|
|
|
3448 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Attributes, Next: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Discarding, Up: SECTIONS
|
3449 |
|
|
|
3450 |
|
|
3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
|
3451 |
|
|
-------------------------------
|
3452 |
|
|
|
3453 |
|
|
We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
|
3454 |
|
|
like this:
|
3455 |
|
|
|
3456 |
|
|
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
3457 |
|
|
[AT(LMA)]
|
3458 |
|
|
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
|
3459 |
|
|
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
3460 |
|
|
[CONSTRAINT]
|
3461 |
|
|
{
|
3462 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3463 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3464 |
|
|
...
|
3465 |
|
|
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
|
3466 |
|
|
|
3467 |
|
|
We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
|
3468 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND. In this section we will describe the remaining
|
3469 |
|
|
section attributes.
|
3470 |
|
|
|
3471 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
3472 |
|
|
|
3473 |
|
|
* Output Section Type:: Output section type
|
3474 |
|
|
* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
|
3475 |
|
|
* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
|
3476 |
|
|
* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
|
3477 |
|
|
* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
|
3478 |
|
|
* Output Section Region:: Output section region
|
3479 |
|
|
* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
|
3480 |
|
|
* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
|
3481 |
|
|
|
3482 |
|
|
|
3483 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Type, Next: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3484 |
|
|
|
3485 |
|
|
3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
|
3486 |
|
|
...........................
|
3487 |
|
|
|
3488 |
|
|
Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
|
3489 |
|
|
parentheses. The following types are defined:
|
3490 |
|
|
|
3491 |
|
|
`NOLOAD'
|
3492 |
|
|
The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
|
3493 |
|
|
be loaded into memory when the program is run.
|
3494 |
|
|
|
3495 |
|
|
`DSECT'
|
3496 |
|
|
`COPY'
|
3497 |
|
|
`INFO'
|
3498 |
|
|
`OVERLAY'
|
3499 |
|
|
These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
|
3500 |
|
|
rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
|
3501 |
|
|
marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
|
3502 |
|
|
section when the program is run.
|
3503 |
|
|
|
3504 |
|
|
The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
|
3505 |
|
|
the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
|
3506 |
|
|
the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
|
3507 |
|
|
section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
|
3508 |
|
|
loaded when the program is run. The contents of the `ROM' section will
|
3509 |
|
|
appear in the linker output file as usual.
|
3510 |
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
3511 |
|
|
ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
|
3512 |
|
|
...
|
3513 |
|
|
}
|
3514 |
|
|
|
3515 |
|
|
|
3516 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section LMA, Next: Forced Output Alignment, Prev: Output Section Type, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3517 |
|
|
|
3518 |
|
|
3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
|
3519 |
|
|
..........................
|
3520 |
|
|
|
3521 |
|
|
Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
|
3522 |
|
|
*Note Basic Script Concepts::. The address expression which may appear
|
3523 |
|
|
in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
|
3524 |
|
|
Address::).
|
3525 |
|
|
|
3526 |
|
|
The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load
|
3527 |
|
|
address of the section.
|
3528 |
|
|
|
3529 |
|
|
Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
|
3530 |
|
|
memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::. Note
|
3531 |
|
|
that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
|
3532 |
|
|
will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
|
3533 |
|
|
|
3534 |
|
|
If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
|
3535 |
|
|
the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and
|
3536 |
|
|
LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the
|
3537 |
|
|
same region. If there is no preceding output section or the section is
|
3538 |
|
|
not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA. *Note
|
3539 |
|
|
Output Section Region::.
|
3540 |
|
|
|
3541 |
|
|
This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
|
3542 |
|
|
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
|
3543 |
|
|
called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
|
3544 |
|
|
loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
|
3545 |
|
|
`0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
|
3546 |
|
|
`0x3000'. The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
|
3547 |
|
|
shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
|
3548 |
|
|
|
3549 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3550 |
|
|
{
|
3551 |
|
|
.text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
|
3552 |
|
|
.mdata 0x2000 :
|
3553 |
|
|
AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
|
3554 |
|
|
{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; }
|
3555 |
|
|
.bss 0x3000 :
|
3556 |
|
|
{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
|
3557 |
|
|
}
|
3558 |
|
|
|
3559 |
|
|
The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
|
3560 |
|
|
with this linker script would include something like the following, to
|
3561 |
|
|
copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
|
3562 |
|
|
Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
|
3563 |
|
|
linker script.
|
3564 |
|
|
|
3565 |
|
|
extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
|
3566 |
|
|
char *src = &_etext;
|
3567 |
|
|
char *dst = &_data;
|
3568 |
|
|
|
3569 |
|
|
/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
|
3570 |
|
|
while (dst < &_edata) {
|
3571 |
|
|
*dst++ = *src++;
|
3572 |
|
|
}
|
3573 |
|
|
|
3574 |
|
|
/* Zero bss */
|
3575 |
|
|
for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
|
3576 |
|
|
*dst = 0;
|
3577 |
|
|
|
3578 |
|
|
|
3579 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Output Alignment, Next: Forced Input Alignment, Prev: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3580 |
|
|
|
3581 |
|
|
3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
|
3582 |
|
|
...............................
|
3583 |
|
|
|
3584 |
|
|
You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
|
3585 |
|
|
|
3586 |
|
|
|
3587 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Input Alignment, Next: Output Section Constraint, Prev: Forced Output Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3588 |
|
|
|
3589 |
|
|
3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
|
3590 |
|
|
..............................
|
3591 |
|
|
|
3592 |
|
|
You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
|
3593 |
|
|
SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
|
3594 |
|
|
sections, whether larger or smaller.
|
3595 |
|
|
|
3596 |
|
|
|
3597 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Constraint, Next: Output Section Region, Prev: Forced Input Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3598 |
|
|
|
3599 |
|
|
3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
|
3600 |
|
|
.................................
|
3601 |
|
|
|
3602 |
|
|
You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
|
3603 |
|
|
its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
|
3604 |
|
|
read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
|
3605 |
|
|
respectively.
|
3606 |
|
|
|
3607 |
|
|
|
3608 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Region, Next: Output Section Phdr, Prev: Output Section Constraint, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3609 |
|
|
|
3610 |
|
|
3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
|
3611 |
|
|
.............................
|
3612 |
|
|
|
3613 |
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
|
3614 |
|
|
using `>REGION'. *Note MEMORY::.
|
3615 |
|
|
|
3616 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
3617 |
|
|
MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
|
3618 |
|
|
SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
|
3619 |
|
|
|
3620 |
|
|
|
3621 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Phdr, Next: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Region, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3622 |
|
|
|
3623 |
|
|
3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
|
3624 |
|
|
...........................
|
3625 |
|
|
|
3626 |
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
|
3627 |
|
|
using `:PHDR'. *Note PHDRS::. If a section is assigned to one or more
|
3628 |
|
|
segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
|
3629 |
|
|
those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
|
3630 |
|
|
You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
|
3631 |
|
|
segment at all.
|
3632 |
|
|
|
3633 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
3634 |
|
|
PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
|
3635 |
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
|
3636 |
|
|
|
3637 |
|
|
|
3638 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Phdr, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
3639 |
|
|
|
3640 |
|
|
3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
|
3641 |
|
|
...........................
|
3642 |
|
|
|
3643 |
|
|
You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
|
3644 |
|
|
FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::). Any otherwise
|
3645 |
|
|
unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
|
3646 |
|
|
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
|
3647 |
|
|
filled with the value, repeated as necessary. If the fill expression
|
3648 |
|
|
is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
|
3649 |
|
|
and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
|
3650 |
|
|
hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros
|
3651 |
|
|
become part of the pattern too. For all other cases, including extra
|
3652 |
|
|
parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
|
3653 |
|
|
significant bytes of the value of the expression. In all cases, the
|
3654 |
|
|
number is big-endian.
|
3655 |
|
|
|
3656 |
|
|
You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
|
3657 |
|
|
output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
|
3658 |
|
|
|
3659 |
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
3660 |
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
|
3661 |
|
|
|
3662 |
|
|
|
3663 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Attributes, Up: SECTIONS
|
3664 |
|
|
|
3665 |
|
|
3.6.9 Overlay Description
|
3666 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
3667 |
|
|
|
3668 |
|
|
An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
|
3669 |
|
|
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
|
3670 |
|
|
the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
|
3671 |
|
|
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
|
3672 |
|
|
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
|
3673 |
|
|
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
|
3674 |
|
|
than another.
|
3675 |
|
|
|
3676 |
|
|
Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command. The `OVERLAY'
|
3677 |
|
|
command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
|
3678 |
|
|
description. The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
|
3679 |
|
|
OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
|
3680 |
|
|
{
|
3681 |
|
|
SECNAME1
|
3682 |
|
|
{
|
3683 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3684 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3685 |
|
|
...
|
3686 |
|
|
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
3687 |
|
|
SECNAME2
|
3688 |
|
|
{
|
3689 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3690 |
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
3691 |
|
|
...
|
3692 |
|
|
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
3693 |
|
|
...
|
3694 |
|
|
} [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
3695 |
|
|
|
3696 |
|
|
Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
|
3697 |
|
|
section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above). The section
|
3698 |
|
|
definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
|
3699 |
|
|
within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
|
3700 |
|
|
no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
|
3701 |
|
|
an `OVERLAY'.
|
3702 |
|
|
|
3703 |
|
|
The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The
|
3704 |
|
|
load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
|
3705 |
|
|
consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
|
3706 |
|
|
`OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
|
3707 |
|
|
address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
|
3708 |
|
|
address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
|
3709 |
|
|
location counter).
|
3710 |
|
|
|
3711 |
|
|
If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
|
3712 |
|
|
the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections all
|
3713 |
|
|
run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
|
3714 |
|
|
section to refer directly to another. *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
|
3715 |
|
|
Commands.
|
3716 |
|
|
|
3717 |
|
|
For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
|
3718 |
|
|
provides two symbols. The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
|
3719 |
|
|
the starting load address of the section. The symbol
|
3720 |
|
|
`__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
|
3721 |
|
|
section. Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
|
3722 |
|
|
identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
|
3723 |
|
|
to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
|
3724 |
|
|
|
3725 |
|
|
At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
|
3726 |
|
|
to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
|
3727 |
|
|
section.
|
3728 |
|
|
|
3729 |
|
|
Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
|
3730 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' construct.
|
3731 |
|
|
OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
|
3732 |
|
|
{
|
3733 |
|
|
.text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
3734 |
|
|
.text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
3735 |
|
|
}
|
3736 |
|
|
This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
|
3737 |
|
|
0x1000. `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
|
3738 |
|
|
be loaded immediately after `.text0'. The following symbols will be
|
3739 |
|
|
defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
|
3740 |
|
|
`__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
|
3741 |
|
|
|
3742 |
|
|
C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
|
3743 |
|
|
like the following.
|
3744 |
|
|
|
3745 |
|
|
extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
|
3746 |
|
|
memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
|
3747 |
|
|
&__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
|
3748 |
|
|
|
3749 |
|
|
Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
|
3750 |
|
|
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
|
3751 |
|
|
example could have been written identically as follows.
|
3752 |
|
|
|
3753 |
|
|
.text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
3754 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
|
3755 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
|
3756 |
|
|
.text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
3757 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
|
3758 |
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
|
3759 |
|
|
. = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
|
3760 |
|
|
|
3761 |
|
|
|
3762 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MEMORY, Next: PHDRS, Prev: SECTIONS, Up: Scripts
|
3763 |
|
|
|
3764 |
|
|
3.7 MEMORY Command
|
3765 |
|
|
==================
|
3766 |
|
|
|
3767 |
|
|
The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
|
3768 |
|
|
memory. You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
|
3769 |
|
|
|
3770 |
|
|
The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
|
3771 |
|
|
memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
|
3772 |
|
|
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
|
3773 |
|
|
can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
|
3774 |
|
|
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
|
3775 |
|
|
regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
|
3776 |
|
|
around to fit into the available regions.
|
3777 |
|
|
|
3778 |
|
|
A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
|
3779 |
|
|
However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
|
3780 |
|
|
wish. The syntax is:
|
3781 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
3782 |
|
|
{
|
3783 |
|
|
NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
|
3784 |
|
|
...
|
3785 |
|
|
}
|
3786 |
|
|
|
3787 |
|
|
The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
|
3788 |
|
|
The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script. Region
|
3789 |
|
|
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
3790 |
|
|
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region must
|
3791 |
|
|
have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command. However you can add
|
3792 |
|
|
later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note
|
3793 |
|
|
REGION_ALIAS:: command.
|
3794 |
|
|
|
3795 |
|
|
The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
|
3796 |
|
|
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
|
3797 |
|
|
not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in *Note
|
3798 |
|
|
SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
|
3799 |
|
|
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
|
3800 |
|
|
the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
|
3801 |
|
|
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
|
3802 |
|
|
|
3803 |
|
|
The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
|
3804 |
|
|
`R'
|
3805 |
|
|
Read-only section
|
3806 |
|
|
|
3807 |
|
|
`W'
|
3808 |
|
|
Read/write section
|
3809 |
|
|
|
3810 |
|
|
`X'
|
3811 |
|
|
Executable section
|
3812 |
|
|
|
3813 |
|
|
`A'
|
3814 |
|
|
Allocatable section
|
3815 |
|
|
|
3816 |
|
|
`I'
|
3817 |
|
|
Initialized section
|
3818 |
|
|
|
3819 |
|
|
`L'
|
3820 |
|
|
Same as `I'
|
3821 |
|
|
|
3822 |
|
|
`!'
|
3823 |
|
|
Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
|
3824 |
|
|
|
3825 |
|
|
If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
|
3826 |
|
|
`!', it will be placed in the memory region. The `!' attribute
|
3827 |
|
|
reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
|
3828 |
|
|
memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
|
3829 |
|
|
|
3830 |
|
|
The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
|
3831 |
|
|
memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
|
3832 |
|
|
cannot involve any symbols. The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
|
3833 |
|
|
`org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
|
3834 |
|
|
|
3835 |
|
|
The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
|
3836 |
|
|
As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
|
3837 |
|
|
and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword `LENGTH' may be
|
3838 |
|
|
abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
|
3839 |
|
|
|
3840 |
|
|
In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
|
3841 |
|
|
regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
|
3842 |
|
|
and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes. The linker
|
3843 |
|
|
will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
|
3844 |
|
|
explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
|
3845 |
|
|
executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
|
3846 |
|
|
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
|
3847 |
|
|
|
3848 |
|
|
MEMORY
|
3849 |
|
|
{
|
3850 |
|
|
rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
|
3851 |
|
|
ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
|
3852 |
|
|
}
|
3853 |
|
|
|
3854 |
|
|
Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
|
3855 |
|
|
specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
|
3856 |
|
|
output section attribute. For example, if you have a memory region
|
3857 |
|
|
named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
|
3858 |
|
|
*Note Output Section Region::. If no address was specified for the
|
3859 |
|
|
output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
|
3860 |
|
|
address within the memory region. If the combined output sections
|
3861 |
|
|
directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
|
3862 |
|
|
will issue an error message.
|
3863 |
|
|
|
3864 |
|
|
It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
|
3865 |
|
|
expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
|
3866 |
|
|
|
3867 |
|
|
_fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
|
3868 |
|
|
|
3869 |
|
|
|
3870 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PHDRS, Next: VERSION, Prev: MEMORY, Up: Scripts
|
3871 |
|
|
|
3872 |
|
|
3.8 PHDRS Command
|
3873 |
|
|
=================
|
3874 |
|
|
|
3875 |
|
|
The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
|
3876 |
|
|
"segments". The program headers describe how the program should be
|
3877 |
|
|
loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the `objdump'
|
3878 |
|
|
program with the `-p' option.
|
3879 |
|
|
|
3880 |
|
|
When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
|
3881 |
|
|
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
|
3882 |
|
|
program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
|
3883 |
|
|
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
|
3884 |
|
|
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
|
3885 |
|
|
|
3886 |
|
|
The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
|
3887 |
|
|
However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
|
3888 |
|
|
precisely. You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose. When the
|
3889 |
|
|
linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
|
3890 |
|
|
create any program headers other than the ones specified.
|
3891 |
|
|
|
3892 |
|
|
The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
|
3893 |
|
|
generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
|
3894 |
|
|
ignore `PHDRS'.
|
3895 |
|
|
|
3896 |
|
|
This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command. The words `PHDRS',
|
3897 |
|
|
`FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
|
3898 |
|
|
|
3899 |
|
|
PHDRS
|
3900 |
|
|
{
|
3901 |
|
|
NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
|
3902 |
|
|
[ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
|
3903 |
|
|
}
|
3904 |
|
|
|
3905 |
|
|
The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
|
3906 |
|
|
linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program header
|
3907 |
|
|
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
3908 |
|
|
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header must
|
3909 |
|
|
have a distinct name.
|
3910 |
|
|
|
3911 |
|
|
Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
|
3912 |
|
|
system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
|
3913 |
|
|
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
|
3914 |
|
|
sections in the segments. You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
|
3915 |
|
|
to place a section in a particular segment. *Note Output Section
|
3916 |
|
|
Phdr::.
|
3917 |
|
|
|
3918 |
|
|
It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
|
3919 |
|
|
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
|
3920 |
|
|
repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
|
3921 |
|
|
section.
|
3922 |
|
|
|
3923 |
|
|
If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
|
3924 |
|
|
the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
|
3925 |
|
|
specify `:PHDR' in the same segments. This is for convenience, since
|
3926 |
|
|
generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
|
3927 |
|
|
segment. You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
|
3928 |
|
|
the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
|
3929 |
|
|
|
3930 |
|
|
You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
|
3931 |
|
|
program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
|
3932 |
|
|
The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
|
3933 |
|
|
file header. The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
|
3934 |
|
|
the ELF program headers themselves.
|
3935 |
|
|
|
3936 |
|
|
The TYPE may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
|
3937 |
|
|
value of the keyword.
|
3938 |
|
|
|
3939 |
|
|
`PT_NULL' (0)
|
3940 |
|
|
Indicates an unused program header.
|
3941 |
|
|
|
3942 |
|
|
`PT_LOAD' (1)
|
3943 |
|
|
Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
|
3944 |
|
|
loaded from the file.
|
3945 |
|
|
|
3946 |
|
|
`PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
|
3947 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
|
3948 |
|
|
|
3949 |
|
|
`PT_INTERP' (3)
|
3950 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
|
3951 |
|
|
be found.
|
3952 |
|
|
|
3953 |
|
|
`PT_NOTE' (4)
|
3954 |
|
|
Indicates a segment holding note information.
|
3955 |
|
|
|
3956 |
|
|
`PT_SHLIB' (5)
|
3957 |
|
|
A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
|
3958 |
|
|
ELF ABI.
|
3959 |
|
|
|
3960 |
|
|
`PT_PHDR' (6)
|
3961 |
|
|
Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
|
3962 |
|
|
|
3963 |
|
|
EXPRESSION
|
3964 |
|
|
An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This
|
3965 |
|
|
may be used for types not defined above.
|
3966 |
|
|
|
3967 |
|
|
You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
|
3968 |
|
|
address in memory by using an `AT' expression. This is identical to the
|
3969 |
|
|
`AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
|
3970 |
|
|
LMA::). The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
|
3971 |
|
|
section attribute.
|
3972 |
|
|
|
3973 |
|
|
The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
|
3974 |
|
|
which comprise the segment. You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
|
3975 |
|
|
explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of FLAGS must be an
|
3976 |
|
|
integer. It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
|
3977 |
|
|
|
3978 |
|
|
Here is an example of `PHDRS'. This shows a typical set of program
|
3979 |
|
|
headers used on a native ELF system.
|
3980 |
|
|
|
3981 |
|
|
PHDRS
|
3982 |
|
|
{
|
3983 |
|
|
headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
|
3984 |
|
|
interp PT_INTERP ;
|
3985 |
|
|
text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
|
3986 |
|
|
data PT_LOAD ;
|
3987 |
|
|
dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
|
3988 |
|
|
}
|
3989 |
|
|
|
3990 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
3991 |
|
|
{
|
3992 |
|
|
. = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
|
3993 |
|
|
.interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
|
3994 |
|
|
.text : { *(.text) } :text
|
3995 |
|
|
.rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
|
3996 |
|
|
...
|
3997 |
|
|
. = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
|
3998 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) } :data
|
3999 |
|
|
.dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
|
4000 |
|
|
...
|
4001 |
|
|
}
|
4002 |
|
|
|
4003 |
|
|
|
4004 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: VERSION, Next: Expressions, Prev: PHDRS, Up: Scripts
|
4005 |
|
|
|
4006 |
|
|
3.9 VERSION Command
|
4007 |
|
|
===================
|
4008 |
|
|
|
4009 |
|
|
The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
|
4010 |
|
|
only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
|
4011 |
|
|
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
|
4012 |
|
|
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
|
4013 |
|
|
shared library.
|
4014 |
|
|
|
4015 |
|
|
You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
|
4016 |
|
|
or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You
|
4017 |
|
|
can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
|
4018 |
|
|
|
4019 |
|
|
The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
|
4020 |
|
|
VERSION { version-script-commands }
|
4021 |
|
|
|
4022 |
|
|
The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
|
4023 |
|
|
by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
|
4024 |
|
|
version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
|
4025 |
|
|
version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
|
4026 |
|
|
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
|
4027 |
|
|
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
|
4028 |
|
|
library.
|
4029 |
|
|
|
4030 |
|
|
The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
|
4031 |
|
|
few examples.
|
4032 |
|
|
|
4033 |
|
|
VERS_1.1 {
|
4034 |
|
|
global:
|
4035 |
|
|
foo1;
|
4036 |
|
|
local:
|
4037 |
|
|
old*;
|
4038 |
|
|
original*;
|
4039 |
|
|
new*;
|
4040 |
|
|
};
|
4041 |
|
|
|
4042 |
|
|
VERS_1.2 {
|
4043 |
|
|
foo2;
|
4044 |
|
|
} VERS_1.1;
|
4045 |
|
|
|
4046 |
|
|
VERS_2.0 {
|
4047 |
|
|
bar1; bar2;
|
4048 |
|
|
extern "C++" {
|
4049 |
|
|
ns::*;
|
4050 |
|
|
"int f(int, double)";
|
4051 |
|
|
}
|
4052 |
|
|
} VERS_1.2;
|
4053 |
|
|
|
4054 |
|
|
This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
|
4055 |
|
|
version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies. The
|
4056 |
|
|
script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'. It reduces a number of
|
4057 |
|
|
symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
|
4058 |
|
|
shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
|
4059 |
|
|
symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
|
4060 |
|
|
The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
|
4061 |
|
|
when matching filenames (also known as "globbing"). However, if you
|
4062 |
|
|
specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
|
4063 |
|
|
as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
|
4064 |
|
|
|
4065 |
|
|
Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'. This node depends
|
4066 |
|
|
upon `VERS_1.1'. The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
|
4067 |
|
|
node `VERS_1.2'.
|
4068 |
|
|
|
4069 |
|
|
Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'. This node
|
4070 |
|
|
depends upon `VERS_1.2'. The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
|
4071 |
|
|
`bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
|
4072 |
|
|
|
4073 |
|
|
When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
|
4074 |
|
|
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
|
4075 |
|
|
unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
|
4076 |
|
|
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
|
4077 |
|
|
somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
|
4078 |
|
|
wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
|
4079 |
|
|
wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
|
4080 |
|
|
set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
|
4081 |
|
|
ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
|
4082 |
|
|
|
4083 |
|
|
The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
|
4084 |
|
|
what they might suggest to the person reading them. The `2.0' version
|
4085 |
|
|
could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'. However,
|
4086 |
|
|
this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
|
4087 |
|
|
|
4088 |
|
|
Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
|
4089 |
|
|
the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
|
4090 |
|
|
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
|
4091 |
|
|
which won't.
|
4092 |
|
|
|
4093 |
|
|
{ global: foo; bar; local: *; };
|
4094 |
|
|
|
4095 |
|
|
When you link an application against a shared library that has
|
4096 |
|
|
versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
|
4097 |
|
|
symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
|
4098 |
|
|
each shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
|
4099 |
|
|
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
|
4100 |
|
|
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
|
4101 |
|
|
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
|
4102 |
|
|
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
|
4103 |
|
|
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
|
4104 |
|
|
search for each symbol reference.
|
4105 |
|
|
|
4106 |
|
|
The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
|
4107 |
|
|
doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
|
4108 |
|
|
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
|
4109 |
|
|
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
|
4110 |
|
|
the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
|
4111 |
|
|
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
|
4112 |
|
|
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
|
4113 |
|
|
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
|
4114 |
|
|
the libraries being used with the application are too old.
|
4115 |
|
|
|
4116 |
|
|
There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
|
4117 |
|
|
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
|
4118 |
|
|
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
|
4119 |
|
|
script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
|
4120 |
|
|
maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
|
4121 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
4122 |
|
|
in the C source file. This renames the function `original_foo' to
|
4123 |
|
|
be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'. The
|
4124 |
|
|
`local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
|
4125 |
|
|
from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
|
4126 |
|
|
version script.
|
4127 |
|
|
|
4128 |
|
|
The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
|
4129 |
|
|
function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
|
4130 |
|
|
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
|
4131 |
|
|
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
|
4132 |
|
|
linked against the old interface to continue to function.
|
4133 |
|
|
|
4134 |
|
|
To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
|
4135 |
|
|
file. Here is an example:
|
4136 |
|
|
|
4137 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
|
4138 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
4139 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
|
4140 |
|
|
__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
|
4141 |
|
|
|
4142 |
|
|
In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
|
4143 |
|
|
unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains
|
4144 |
|
|
this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
|
4145 |
|
|
`old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
|
4146 |
|
|
|
4147 |
|
|
When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
|
4148 |
|
|
be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
|
4149 |
|
|
this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
|
4150 |
|
|
type of `.symver' directive. You can only declare one version of a
|
4151 |
|
|
symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
|
4152 |
|
|
have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
|
4153 |
|
|
|
4154 |
|
|
If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
|
4155 |
|
|
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
|
4156 |
|
|
(i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
|
4157 |
|
|
specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
|
4158 |
|
|
|
4159 |
|
|
You can also specify the language in the version script:
|
4160 |
|
|
|
4161 |
|
|
VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
|
4162 |
|
|
|
4163 |
|
|
The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'. The linker will
|
4164 |
|
|
iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
|
4165 |
|
|
according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
|
4166 |
|
|
`version-script-commands'.
|
4167 |
|
|
|
4168 |
|
|
Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
|
4169 |
|
|
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
|
4170 |
|
|
or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
|
4171 |
|
|
the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
|
4172 |
|
|
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
|
4173 |
|
|
cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler might
|
4174 |
|
|
change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
|
4175 |
|
|
check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
|
4176 |
|
|
when you upgrade.
|
4177 |
|
|
|
4178 |
|
|
|
4179 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Expressions, Next: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: VERSION, Up: Scripts
|
4180 |
|
|
|
4181 |
|
|
3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
4182 |
|
|
==================================
|
4183 |
|
|
|
4184 |
|
|
The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
|
4185 |
|
|
that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
|
4186 |
|
|
expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
|
4187 |
|
|
host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
|
4188 |
|
|
|
4189 |
|
|
You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
|
4190 |
|
|
|
4191 |
|
|
The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
|
4192 |
|
|
in expressions.
|
4193 |
|
|
|
4194 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
4195 |
|
|
|
4196 |
|
|
* Constants:: Constants
|
4197 |
|
|
* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
|
4198 |
|
|
* Symbols:: Symbol Names
|
4199 |
|
|
* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
|
4200 |
|
|
* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
|
4201 |
|
|
* Operators:: Operators
|
4202 |
|
|
* Evaluation:: Evaluation
|
4203 |
|
|
* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
|
4204 |
|
|
* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
|
4205 |
|
|
|
4206 |
|
|
|
4207 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Constants, Next: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
4208 |
|
|
|
4209 |
|
|
3.10.1 Constants
|
4210 |
|
|
----------------
|
4211 |
|
|
|
4212 |
|
|
All constants are integers.
|
4213 |
|
|
|
4214 |
|
|
As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
|
4215 |
|
|
octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
|
4216 |
|
|
Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
|
4217 |
|
|
hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
|
4218 |
|
|
for decimal. Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
|
4219 |
|
|
considered to be decimal.
|
4220 |
|
|
|
4221 |
|
|
In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
|
4222 |
|
|
constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
|
4223 |
|
|
following all refer to the same quantity:
|
4224 |
|
|
|
4225 |
|
|
_fourk_1 = 4K;
|
4226 |
|
|
_fourk_2 = 4096;
|
4227 |
|
|
_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
|
4228 |
|
|
_fourk_4 = 10000o;
|
4229 |
|
|
|
4230 |
|
|
Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
|
4231 |
|
|
the base suffixes mentioned above.
|
4232 |
|
|
|
4233 |
|
|
|
4234 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Symbolic Constants, Next: Symbols, Prev: Constants, Up: Expressions
|
4235 |
|
|
|
4236 |
|
|
3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
|
4237 |
|
|
-------------------------
|
4238 |
|
|
|
4239 |
|
|
It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
|
4240 |
|
|
`CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
|
4241 |
|
|
|
4242 |
|
|
`MAXPAGESIZE'
|
4243 |
|
|
The target's maximum page size.
|
4244 |
|
|
|
4245 |
|
|
`COMMONPAGESIZE'
|
4246 |
|
|
The target's default page size.
|
4247 |
|
|
|
4248 |
|
|
So for example:
|
4249 |
|
|
|
4250 |
|
|
.text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
|
4251 |
|
|
|
4252 |
|
|
will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
|
4253 |
|
|
supported by the target.
|
4254 |
|
|
|
4255 |
|
|
|
4256 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Symbols, Next: Orphan Sections, Prev: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
4257 |
|
|
|
4258 |
|
|
3.10.3 Symbol Names
|
4259 |
|
|
-------------------
|
4260 |
|
|
|
4261 |
|
|
Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
|
4262 |
|
|
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
|
4263 |
|
|
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
|
4264 |
|
|
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
|
4265 |
|
|
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
|
4266 |
|
|
"SECTION" = 9;
|
4267 |
|
|
"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
|
4268 |
|
|
|
4269 |
|
|
Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
|
4270 |
|
|
safest to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, `A-B' is one
|
4271 |
|
|
symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
|
4272 |
|
|
|
4273 |
|
|
|
4274 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Orphan Sections, Next: Location Counter, Prev: Symbols, Up: Expressions
|
4275 |
|
|
|
4276 |
|
|
3.10.4 Orphan Sections
|
4277 |
|
|
----------------------
|
4278 |
|
|
|
4279 |
|
|
Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
|
4280 |
|
|
explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script. The
|
4281 |
|
|
linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
|
4282 |
|
|
to guess as to where they should be placed. The linker uses a simple
|
4283 |
|
|
heuristic to do this. It attempts to place orphan sections after
|
4284 |
|
|
non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
|
4285 |
|
|
loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If there is not enough room to do this
|
4286 |
|
|
then it places at the end of the file.
|
4287 |
|
|
|
4288 |
|
|
For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
|
4289 |
|
|
as well as section flag.
|
4290 |
|
|
|
4291 |
|
|
If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
|
4292 |
|
|
the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
|
4293 |
|
|
__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
|
4294 |
|
|
section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
|
4295 |
|
|
orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
|
4296 |
|
|
representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
|
4297 |
|
|
|
4298 |
|
|
|
4299 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Location Counter, Next: Operators, Prev: Orphan Sections, Up: Expressions
|
4300 |
|
|
|
4301 |
|
|
3.10.5 The Location Counter
|
4302 |
|
|
---------------------------
|
4303 |
|
|
|
4304 |
|
|
The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
|
4305 |
|
|
output location counter. Since the `.' always refers to a location in
|
4306 |
|
|
an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
|
4307 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' command. The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
|
4308 |
|
|
ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
|
4309 |
|
|
|
4310 |
|
|
Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
|
4311 |
|
|
moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
|
4312 |
|
|
location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
|
4313 |
|
|
and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
|
4314 |
|
|
creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
|
4315 |
|
|
|
4316 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4317 |
|
|
{
|
4318 |
|
|
output :
|
4319 |
|
|
{
|
4320 |
|
|
file1(.text)
|
4321 |
|
|
. = . + 1000;
|
4322 |
|
|
file2(.text)
|
4323 |
|
|
. += 1000;
|
4324 |
|
|
file3(.text)
|
4325 |
|
|
} = 0x12345678;
|
4326 |
|
|
}
|
4327 |
|
|
In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
|
4328 |
|
|
at the beginning of the output section `output'. It is followed by a
|
4329 |
|
|
1000 byte gap. Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
|
4330 |
|
|
with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
|
4331 |
|
|
The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
|
4332 |
|
|
(*note Output Section Fill::).
|
4333 |
|
|
|
4334 |
|
|
Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
|
4335 |
|
|
current containing object. Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
|
4336 |
|
|
whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
|
4337 |
|
|
If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
|
4338 |
|
|
byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
|
4339 |
|
|
Thus in a script like this:
|
4340 |
|
|
|
4341 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4342 |
|
|
{
|
4343 |
|
|
. = 0x100
|
4344 |
|
|
.text: {
|
4345 |
|
|
*(.text)
|
4346 |
|
|
. = 0x200
|
4347 |
|
|
}
|
4348 |
|
|
. = 0x500
|
4349 |
|
|
.data: {
|
4350 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
4351 |
|
|
. += 0x600
|
4352 |
|
|
}
|
4353 |
|
|
}
|
4354 |
|
|
|
4355 |
|
|
The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
|
4356 |
|
|
a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
|
4357 |
|
|
`.text' input sections to fill this area. (If there is too much data,
|
4358 |
|
|
an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
|
4359 |
|
|
backwards). The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
|
4360 |
|
|
an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
|
4361 |
|
|
the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
|
4362 |
|
|
section itself.
|
4363 |
|
|
|
4364 |
|
|
Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
|
4365 |
|
|
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
|
4366 |
|
|
needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
|
4367 |
|
|
|
4368 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4369 |
|
|
{
|
4370 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
4371 |
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
4372 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
4373 |
|
|
|
4374 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
4375 |
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
4376 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
4377 |
|
|
}
|
4378 |
|
|
|
4379 |
|
|
If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
|
4380 |
|
|
mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
|
4381 |
|
|
`.text' and `.data'. You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
|
4382 |
|
|
on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
|
4383 |
|
|
particular significance to the linker. As well, the linker doesn't
|
4384 |
|
|
associate the above symbol names with their sections. Instead, it
|
4385 |
|
|
assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
|
4386 |
|
|
output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
|
4387 |
|
|
I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
|
4388 |
|
|
script was written as follows:
|
4389 |
|
|
|
4390 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4391 |
|
|
{
|
4392 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
4393 |
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
4394 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
4395 |
|
|
|
4396 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
4397 |
|
|
.rodata: { *(.rodata) }
|
4398 |
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
4399 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
4400 |
|
|
}
|
4401 |
|
|
|
4402 |
|
|
This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
|
4403 |
|
|
`start_of_data'. One way to influence the orphan section placement is
|
4404 |
|
|
to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
|
4405 |
|
|
assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
|
4406 |
|
|
section and thus should be grouped with that section. So you could
|
4407 |
|
|
write:
|
4408 |
|
|
|
4409 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4410 |
|
|
{
|
4411 |
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
4412 |
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
4413 |
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
4414 |
|
|
|
4415 |
|
|
. = . ;
|
4416 |
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
4417 |
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
4418 |
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
4419 |
|
|
}
|
4420 |
|
|
|
4421 |
|
|
Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
|
4422 |
|
|
`end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
|
4423 |
|
|
|
4424 |
|
|
|
4425 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Operators, Next: Evaluation, Prev: Location Counter, Up: Expressions
|
4426 |
|
|
|
4427 |
|
|
3.10.6 Operators
|
4428 |
|
|
----------------
|
4429 |
|
|
|
4430 |
|
|
The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
|
4431 |
|
|
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
|
4432 |
|
|
precedence associativity Operators Notes
|
4433 |
|
|
(highest)
|
4434 |
|
|
1 left ! - ~ (1)
|
4435 |
|
|
2 left * / %
|
4436 |
|
|
3 left + -
|
4437 |
|
|
4 left >> <<
|
4438 |
|
|
5 left == != > < <= >=
|
4439 |
|
|
6 left &
|
4440 |
|
|
7 left |
|
4441 |
|
|
8 left &&
|
4442 |
|
|
9 left ||
|
4443 |
|
|
10 right ? :
|
4444 |
|
|
11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
|
4445 |
|
|
(lowest)
|
4446 |
|
|
Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
|
4447 |
|
|
|
4448 |
|
|
|
4449 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Evaluation, Next: Expression Section, Prev: Operators, Up: Expressions
|
4450 |
|
|
|
4451 |
|
|
3.10.7 Evaluation
|
4452 |
|
|
-----------------
|
4453 |
|
|
|
4454 |
|
|
The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
|
4455 |
|
|
an expression when absolutely necessary.
|
4456 |
|
|
|
4457 |
|
|
The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
|
4458 |
|
|
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
|
4459 |
|
|
regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
|
4460 |
|
|
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
|
4461 |
|
|
|
4462 |
|
|
However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
|
4463 |
|
|
until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
|
4464 |
|
|
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
|
4465 |
|
|
for use in the symbol assignment expression.
|
4466 |
|
|
|
4467 |
|
|
The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
|
4468 |
|
|
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
|
4469 |
|
|
allocation.
|
4470 |
|
|
|
4471 |
|
|
Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
|
4472 |
|
|
`.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
|
4473 |
|
|
|
4474 |
|
|
If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
|
4475 |
|
|
available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
|
4476 |
|
|
following
|
4477 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4478 |
|
|
{
|
4479 |
|
|
.text 9+this_isnt_constant :
|
4480 |
|
|
{ *(.text) }
|
4481 |
|
|
}
|
4482 |
|
|
will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
|
4483 |
|
|
address'.
|
4484 |
|
|
|
4485 |
|
|
|
4486 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Expression Section, Next: Builtin Functions, Prev: Evaluation, Up: Expressions
|
4487 |
|
|
|
4488 |
|
|
3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
|
4489 |
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
4490 |
|
|
|
4491 |
|
|
When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
|
4492 |
|
|
or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
|
4493 |
|
|
fixed offset from the base of a section.
|
4494 |
|
|
|
4495 |
|
|
The position of the expression within the linker script determines
|
4496 |
|
|
whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
|
4497 |
|
|
an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
|
4498 |
|
|
section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
|
4499 |
|
|
|
4500 |
|
|
A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
|
4501 |
|
|
request relocatable output using the `-r' option. That means that a
|
4502 |
|
|
further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
|
4503 |
|
|
section will be the section of the relative expression.
|
4504 |
|
|
|
4505 |
|
|
A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
|
4506 |
|
|
through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
|
4507 |
|
|
will not have any particular associated section.
|
4508 |
|
|
|
4509 |
|
|
You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
|
4510 |
|
|
to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
|
4511 |
|
|
create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
|
4512 |
|
|
section `.data':
|
4513 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
4514 |
|
|
{
|
4515 |
|
|
.data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
|
4516 |
|
|
}
|
4517 |
|
|
If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
|
4518 |
|
|
`.data' section.
|
4519 |
|
|
|
4520 |
|
|
|
4521 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Builtin Functions, Prev: Expression Section, Up: Expressions
|
4522 |
|
|
|
4523 |
|
|
3.10.9 Builtin Functions
|
4524 |
|
|
------------------------
|
4525 |
|
|
|
4526 |
|
|
The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
|
4527 |
|
|
use in linker script expressions.
|
4528 |
|
|
|
4529 |
|
|
`ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
|
4530 |
|
|
Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
|
4531 |
|
|
value of the expression EXP. Primarily useful to assign an
|
4532 |
|
|
absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
|
4533 |
|
|
symbol values are normally section relative. *Note Expression
|
4534 |
|
|
Section::.
|
4535 |
|
|
|
4536 |
|
|
`ADDR(SECTION)'
|
4537 |
|
|
Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION. Your
|
4538 |
|
|
script must previously have defined the location of that section.
|
4539 |
|
|
In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
|
4540 |
|
|
identical values:
|
4541 |
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
4542 |
|
|
.output1 :
|
4543 |
|
|
{
|
4544 |
|
|
start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
|
4545 |
|
|
...
|
4546 |
|
|
}
|
4547 |
|
|
.output :
|
4548 |
|
|
{
|
4549 |
|
|
symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
|
4550 |
|
|
symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
|
4551 |
|
|
}
|
4552 |
|
|
... }
|
4553 |
|
|
|
4554 |
|
|
`ALIGN(ALIGN)'
|
4555 |
|
|
`ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
|
4556 |
|
|
Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
|
4557 |
|
|
to the next ALIGN boundary. The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
|
4558 |
|
|
change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
|
4559 |
|
|
on it. The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
|
4560 |
|
|
be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
|
4561 |
|
|
ALIGN)').
|
4562 |
|
|
|
4563 |
|
|
Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
|
4564 |
|
|
next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
|
4565 |
|
|
variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
|
4566 |
|
|
input sections:
|
4567 |
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
4568 |
|
|
.data ALIGN(0x2000): {
|
4569 |
|
|
*(.data)
|
4570 |
|
|
variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
|
4571 |
|
|
}
|
4572 |
|
|
... }
|
4573 |
|
|
The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
|
4574 |
|
|
location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
|
4575 |
|
|
attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
|
4576 |
|
|
Address::). The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
|
4577 |
|
|
value of a symbol.
|
4578 |
|
|
|
4579 |
|
|
The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
|
4580 |
|
|
|
4581 |
|
|
`ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
|
4582 |
|
|
Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
|
4583 |
|
|
section has been allocated. If the section has not been allocated
|
4584 |
|
|
when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
|
4585 |
|
|
following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
|
4586 |
|
|
stored as the first value in that section.
|
4587 |
|
|
SECTIONS{ ...
|
4588 |
|
|
.output {
|
4589 |
|
|
LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
|
4590 |
|
|
...
|
4591 |
|
|
}
|
4592 |
|
|
... }
|
4593 |
|
|
|
4594 |
|
|
`BLOCK(EXP)'
|
4595 |
|
|
This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
|
4596 |
|
|
scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an
|
4597 |
|
|
output section.
|
4598 |
|
|
|
4599 |
|
|
`DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
|
4600 |
|
|
This is equivalent to either
|
4601 |
|
|
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
|
4602 |
|
|
or
|
4603 |
|
|
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
|
4604 |
|
|
depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
|
4605 |
|
|
pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
|
4606 |
|
|
expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not. If the
|
4607 |
|
|
latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
|
4608 |
|
|
memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
|
4609 |
|
|
bytes in the on-disk file.
|
4610 |
|
|
|
4611 |
|
|
This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
|
4612 |
|
|
not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
|
4613 |
|
|
script. COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
|
4614 |
|
|
should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
|
4615 |
|
|
for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
|
4616 |
|
|
|
4617 |
|
|
Example:
|
4618 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
|
4619 |
|
|
|
4620 |
|
|
`DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
|
4621 |
|
|
This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
|
4622 |
|
|
evaluation purposes.
|
4623 |
|
|
|
4624 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
|
4625 |
|
|
|
4626 |
|
|
`DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
|
4627 |
|
|
This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
|
4628 |
|
|
option is used. Second argument is returned. When `-z relro'
|
4629 |
|
|
option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
|
4630 |
|
|
otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
|
4631 |
|
|
aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
|
4632 |
|
|
target. If present in the linker script, it must always come in
|
4633 |
|
|
between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
|
4634 |
|
|
|
4635 |
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
|
4636 |
|
|
|
4637 |
|
|
`DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
|
4638 |
|
|
Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
|
4639 |
|
|
defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
|
4640 |
|
|
return 0. You can use this function to provide default values for
|
4641 |
|
|
symbols. For example, the following script fragment shows how to
|
4642 |
|
|
set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
|
4643 |
|
|
section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
|
4644 |
|
|
is preserved:
|
4645 |
|
|
|
4646 |
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
4647 |
|
|
.text : {
|
4648 |
|
|
begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
|
4649 |
|
|
...
|
4650 |
|
|
}
|
4651 |
|
|
...
|
4652 |
|
|
}
|
4653 |
|
|
|
4654 |
|
|
`LENGTH(MEMORY)'
|
4655 |
|
|
Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
4656 |
|
|
|
4657 |
|
|
`LOADADDR(SECTION)'
|
4658 |
|
|
Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION. This is normally
|
4659 |
|
|
the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
|
4660 |
|
|
is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
|
4661 |
|
|
LMA::).
|
4662 |
|
|
|
4663 |
|
|
`MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
4664 |
|
|
Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
4665 |
|
|
|
4666 |
|
|
`MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
4667 |
|
|
Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
4668 |
|
|
|
4669 |
|
|
`NEXT(EXP)'
|
4670 |
|
|
Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
|
4671 |
|
|
This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
|
4672 |
|
|
the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
|
4673 |
|
|
file, the two functions are equivalent.
|
4674 |
|
|
|
4675 |
|
|
`ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
|
4676 |
|
|
Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
4677 |
|
|
|
4678 |
|
|
`SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
|
4679 |
|
|
Return the base address of the named SEGMENT. If an explicit
|
4680 |
|
|
value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
|
4681 |
|
|
option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
|
4682 |
|
|
DEFAULT. At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
|
4683 |
|
|
used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
|
4684 |
|
|
sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
|
4685 |
|
|
|
4686 |
|
|
`SIZEOF(SECTION)'
|
4687 |
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
|
4688 |
|
|
been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
4689 |
|
|
evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following
|
4690 |
|
|
example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
|
4691 |
|
|
SECTIONS{ ...
|
4692 |
|
|
.output {
|
4693 |
|
|
.start = . ;
|
4694 |
|
|
...
|
4695 |
|
|
.end = . ;
|
4696 |
|
|
}
|
4697 |
|
|
symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
|
4698 |
|
|
symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
|
4699 |
|
|
... }
|
4700 |
|
|
|
4701 |
|
|
`SIZEOF_HEADERS'
|
4702 |
|
|
`sizeof_headers'
|
4703 |
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
|
4704 |
|
|
information which appears at the start of the output file. You
|
4705 |
|
|
can use this number when setting the start address of the first
|
4706 |
|
|
section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
|
4707 |
|
|
|
4708 |
|
|
When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
|
4709 |
|
|
`SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
|
4710 |
|
|
number of program headers before it has determined all the section
|
4711 |
|
|
addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
|
4712 |
|
|
additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
|
4713 |
|
|
room for program headers'. To avoid this error, you must avoid
|
4714 |
|
|
using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
|
4715 |
|
|
script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
|
4716 |
|
|
headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
|
4717 |
|
|
`PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
|
4718 |
|
|
|
4719 |
|
|
|
4720 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: Expressions, Up: Scripts
|
4721 |
|
|
|
4722 |
|
|
3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
|
4723 |
|
|
============================
|
4724 |
|
|
|
4725 |
|
|
If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
|
4726 |
|
|
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
|
4727 |
|
|
linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
|
4728 |
|
|
linker will report an error.
|
4729 |
|
|
|
4730 |
|
|
An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
|
4731 |
|
|
|
4732 |
|
|
Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
|
4733 |
|
|
assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
|
4734 |
|
|
|
4735 |
|
|
Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
|
4736 |
|
|
read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
|
4737 |
|
|
script was read. This can affect archive searching.
|
4738 |
|
|
|
4739 |
|
|
|
4740 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Machine Dependent, Next: BFD, Prev: Scripts, Up: Top
|
4741 |
|
|
|
4742 |
|
|
4 Machine Dependent Features
|
4743 |
|
|
****************************
|
4744 |
|
|
|
4745 |
|
|
`ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
|
4746 |
|
|
describe them. Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
|
4747 |
|
|
not listed.
|
4748 |
|
|
|
4749 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
4750 |
|
|
|
4751 |
|
|
|
4752 |
|
|
* H8/300:: `ld' and the H8/300
|
4753 |
|
|
|
4754 |
|
|
* i960:: `ld' and the Intel 960 family
|
4755 |
|
|
|
4756 |
|
|
* ARM:: `ld' and the ARM family
|
4757 |
|
|
|
4758 |
|
|
* HPPA ELF32:: `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
4759 |
|
|
|
4760 |
|
|
* M68K:: `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
4761 |
|
|
|
4762 |
|
|
* MMIX:: `ld' and MMIX
|
4763 |
|
|
|
4764 |
|
|
* MSP430:: `ld' and MSP430
|
4765 |
|
|
|
4766 |
|
|
* M68HC11/68HC12:: `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
4767 |
|
|
|
4768 |
|
|
* PowerPC ELF32:: `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
4769 |
|
|
|
4770 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 ELF64:: `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
4771 |
|
|
|
4772 |
|
|
* SPU ELF:: `ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
4773 |
|
|
|
4774 |
|
|
* TI COFF:: `ld' and TI COFF
|
4775 |
|
|
|
4776 |
|
|
* WIN32:: `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
4777 |
|
|
|
4778 |
|
|
* Xtensa:: `ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
4779 |
|
|
|
4780 |
|
|
|
4781 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: H8/300, Next: i960, Up: Machine Dependent
|
4782 |
|
|
|
4783 |
|
|
4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
|
4784 |
|
|
=======================
|
4785 |
|
|
|
4786 |
|
|
For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
|
4787 |
|
|
specify the `--relax' command-line option.
|
4788 |
|
|
|
4789 |
|
|
_relaxing address modes_
|
4790 |
|
|
`ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
4791 |
|
|
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
4792 |
|
|
relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
|
4793 |
|
|
|
4794 |
|
|
_synthesizing instructions_
|
4795 |
|
|
`ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
|
4796 |
|
|
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
4797 |
|
|
changes them to use the eight-bit address form. (That is: the
|
4798 |
|
|
linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
|
4799 |
|
|
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
4800 |
|
|
|
4801 |
|
|
_bit manipulation instructions_
|
4802 |
|
|
`ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
|
4803 |
|
|
biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
|
4804 |
|
|
bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
|
4805 |
|
|
to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
|
4806 |
|
|
address form. (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
|
4807 |
|
|
into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
|
4808 |
|
|
page of memory).
|
4809 |
|
|
|
4810 |
|
|
_system control instructions_
|
4811 |
|
|
`ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
|
4812 |
|
|
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
4813 |
|
|
changes them to use 16 bit address form. (That is: the linker
|
4814 |
|
|
turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
|
4815 |
|
|
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
4816 |
|
|
|
4817 |
|
|
|
4818 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: i960, Next: ARM, Prev: H8/300, Up: Machine Dependent
|
4819 |
|
|
|
4820 |
|
|
4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
|
4821 |
|
|
=================================
|
4822 |
|
|
|
4823 |
|
|
You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
|
4824 |
|
|
the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
|
4825 |
|
|
specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
|
4826 |
|
|
instructions in the input files. It also modifies the linker's search
|
4827 |
|
|
strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
|
4828 |
|
|
specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
|
4829 |
|
|
loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
|
4830 |
|
|
|
4831 |
|
|
For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
|
4832 |
|
|
`-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
|
4833 |
|
|
any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
|
4834 |
|
|
|
4835 |
|
|
try
|
4836 |
|
|
libtry.a
|
4837 |
|
|
tryca
|
4838 |
|
|
libtryca.a
|
4839 |
|
|
|
4840 |
|
|
The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
|
4841 |
|
|
two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
|
4842 |
|
|
|
4843 |
|
|
You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
|
4844 |
|
|
the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
|
4845 |
|
|
each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
|
4846 |
|
|
specifies a library.
|
4847 |
|
|
|
4848 |
|
|
`ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family. If you
|
4849 |
|
|
specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
|
4850 |
|
|
targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
|
4851 |
|
|
relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively. `ld' also turns
|
4852 |
|
|
`cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
|
4853 |
|
|
target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
|
4854 |
|
|
not itself call any subroutines).
|
4855 |
|
|
|
4856 |
|
|
The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
|
4857 |
|
|
erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by
|
4858 |
|
|
default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can
|
4859 |
|
|
be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
|
4860 |
|
|
unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
|
4861 |
|
|
|
4862 |
|
|
The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for
|
4863 |
|
|
further details.
|
4864 |
|
|
|
4865 |
|
|
|
4866 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: M68HC11/68HC12, Next: PowerPC ELF32, Prev: MSP430, Up: Machine Dependent
|
4867 |
|
|
|
4868 |
|
|
4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
4869 |
|
|
====================================================
|
4870 |
|
|
|
4871 |
|
|
4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
|
4872 |
|
|
-----------------------
|
4873 |
|
|
|
4874 |
|
|
For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
|
4875 |
|
|
when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
|
4876 |
|
|
|
4877 |
|
|
_relaxing address modes_
|
4878 |
|
|
`ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
4879 |
|
|
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
4880 |
|
|
relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
|
4881 |
|
|
|
4882 |
|
|
`ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
|
4883 |
|
|
transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
|
4884 |
|
|
page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
|
4885 |
|
|
|
4886 |
|
|
_relaxing gcc instruction group_
|
4887 |
|
|
When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
|
4888 |
|
|
instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
|
4889 |
|
|
addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
|
4890 |
|
|
instructions.
|
4891 |
|
|
|
4892 |
|
|
|
4893 |
|
|
4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
|
4894 |
|
|
---------------------------
|
4895 |
|
|
|
4896 |
|
|
For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
|
4897 |
|
|
function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
|
4898 |
|
|
the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
|
4899 |
|
|
instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
|
4900 |
|
|
pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
|
4901 |
|
|
function trampoline.
|
4902 |
|
|
|
4903 |
|
|
|
4904 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: ARM, Next: HPPA ELF32, Prev: i960, Up: Machine Dependent
|
4905 |
|
|
|
4906 |
|
|
4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
|
4907 |
|
|
===========================
|
4908 |
|
|
|
4909 |
|
|
For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
|
4910 |
|
|
between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
|
4911 |
|
|
been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
|
4912 |
|
|
option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
|
4913 |
|
|
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
|
4914 |
|
|
option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
|
4915 |
|
|
given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
|
4916 |
|
|
which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
|
4917 |
|
|
the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
|
4918 |
|
|
non-interworking aware Thumb code.
|
4919 |
|
|
|
4920 |
|
|
The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
|
4921 |
|
|
switch, in that it sets the program's starting address. But it also
|
4922 |
|
|
sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
|
4923 |
|
|
a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
|
4924 |
|
|
straight away.
|
4925 |
|
|
|
4926 |
|
|
The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
|
4927 |
|
|
the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
|
4928 |
|
|
elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
|
4929 |
|
|
import tables. By default this option is turned off.
|
4930 |
|
|
|
4931 |
|
|
The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
|
4932 |
|
|
executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
|
4933 |
|
|
The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
|
4934 |
|
|
|
4935 |
|
|
The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
|
4936 |
|
|
`.init_array' section. It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
|
4937 |
|
|
`R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target. The `--target1-rel' and
|
4938 |
|
|
`--target1-abs' switches override the default.
|
4939 |
|
|
|
4940 |
|
|
The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
|
4941 |
|
|
`R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation. Valid values for `type', their meanings,
|
4942 |
|
|
and target defaults are as follows:
|
4943 |
|
|
`rel'
|
4944 |
|
|
`R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
|
4945 |
|
|
|
4946 |
|
|
`abs'
|
4947 |
|
|
`R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
|
4948 |
|
|
|
4949 |
|
|
`got-rel'
|
4950 |
|
|
`R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
|
4951 |
|
|
|
4952 |
|
|
The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
|
4953 |
|
|
enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
|
4954 |
|
|
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
|
4955 |
|
|
but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
|
4956 |
|
|
objects.
|
4957 |
|
|
|
4958 |
|
|
In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
|
4959 |
|
|
linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
|
4960 |
|
|
PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
|
4961 |
|
|
|
4962 |
|
|
In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
|
4963 |
|
|
relocations are ignored.
|
4964 |
|
|
|
4965 |
|
|
Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
|
4966 |
|
|
with a branch to the following veneer:
|
4967 |
|
|
|
4968 |
|
|
TST rM, #1
|
4969 |
|
|
MOVEQ PC, rM
|
4970 |
|
|
BX Rn
|
4971 |
|
|
|
4972 |
|
|
This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
|
4973 |
|
|
cores and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer
|
4974 |
|
|
clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
|
4975 |
|
|
rare cases.
|
4976 |
|
|
|
4977 |
|
|
The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
|
4978 |
|
|
instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
|
4979 |
|
|
Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
|
4980 |
|
|
BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
|
4981 |
|
|
entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
|
4982 |
|
|
|
4983 |
|
|
This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
|
4984 |
|
|
to specify it if you are using that target.
|
4985 |
|
|
|
4986 |
|
|
The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
|
4987 |
|
|
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
|
4988 |
|
|
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
|
4989 |
|
|
code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
|
4990 |
|
|
before the support code can read the intended values.
|
4991 |
|
|
|
4992 |
|
|
The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
|
4993 |
|
|
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
|
4994 |
|
|
register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
|
4995 |
|
|
at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
|
4996 |
|
|
only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
|
4997 |
|
|
workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
|
4998 |
|
|
further details.
|
4999 |
|
|
|
5000 |
|
|
If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
|
5001 |
|
|
workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
|
5002 |
|
|
you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
|
5003 |
|
|
if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
|
5004 |
|
|
The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
|
5005 |
|
|
|
5006 |
|
|
If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
|
5007 |
|
|
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
|
5008 |
|
|
such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
|
5009 |
|
|
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
|
5010 |
|
|
instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
|
5011 |
|
|
the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
|
5012 |
|
|
are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
|
5013 |
|
|
|
5014 |
|
|
The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
|
5015 |
|
|
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
|
5016 |
|
|
size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
|
5017 |
|
|
object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
|
5018 |
|
|
enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
|
5019 |
|
|
diagnosed.
|
5020 |
|
|
|
5021 |
|
|
The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
|
5022 |
|
|
warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
|
5023 |
|
|
`wchar_t' size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
|
5024 |
|
|
linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
|
5025 |
|
|
using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
|
5026 |
|
|
|
5027 |
|
|
The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
|
5028 |
|
|
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
|
5029 |
|
|
PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
|
5030 |
|
|
used to generate relocatable binaries.
|
5031 |
|
|
|
5032 |
|
|
The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
|
5033 |
|
|
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
|
5034 |
|
|
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
|
5035 |
|
|
placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
|
5036 |
|
|
controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'. The
|
5037 |
|
|
placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
|
5038 |
|
|
duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
|
5039 |
|
|
group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
|
5040 |
|
|
code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
|
5041 |
|
|
where they should be placed.
|
5042 |
|
|
|
5043 |
|
|
The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
|
5044 |
|
|
controls where the stub groups are placed. If it is negative then all
|
5045 |
|
|
stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them. If it is
|
5046 |
|
|
positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
|
5047 |
|
|
branches that need them. If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
|
5048 |
|
|
then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
|
5049 |
|
|
using its built in heuristics. A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
|
5050 |
|
|
smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
|
5051 |
|
|
service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
|
5052 |
|
|
|
5053 |
|
|
The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
|
5054 |
|
|
|
5055 |
|
|
Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
|
5056 |
|
|
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
|
5057 |
|
|
otherwise.
|
5058 |
|
|
|
5059 |
|
|
|
5060 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: HPPA ELF32, Next: M68K, Prev: ARM, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5061 |
|
|
|
5062 |
|
|
4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
|
5063 |
|
|
====================================
|
5064 |
|
|
|
5065 |
|
|
When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
|
5066 |
|
|
stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application. The
|
5067 |
|
|
`--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
|
5068 |
|
|
different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
|
5069 |
|
|
sub-spaces.
|
5070 |
|
|
|
5071 |
|
|
Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
|
5072 |
|
|
sections located between groups of input sections. `--stub-group-size'
|
5073 |
|
|
specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
|
5074 |
|
|
stub section. Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
|
5075 |
|
|
serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
|
5076 |
|
|
and one group after it. However, when using conditional branches that
|
5077 |
|
|
require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
|
5078 |
|
|
sections only serve one group of input sections. A negative value for
|
5079 |
|
|
`N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
|
5080 |
|
|
negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
|
5081 |
|
|
`-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
|
5082 |
|
|
groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
|
5083 |
|
|
stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
|
5084 |
|
|
|
5085 |
|
|
Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
5086 |
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
5087 |
|
|
create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
5088 |
|
|
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
5089 |
|
|
|
5090 |
|
|
|
5091 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: M68K, Next: MMIX, Prev: HPPA ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5092 |
|
|
|
5093 |
|
|
4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
5094 |
|
|
====================================
|
5095 |
|
|
|
5096 |
|
|
The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme. The
|
5097 |
|
|
choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'. When
|
5098 |
|
|
`target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
|
5099 |
|
|
scheme for the current target. `single' tells the linker to generate a
|
5100 |
|
|
single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets. `negative'
|
5101 |
|
|
instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
|
5102 |
|
|
negative and positive offsets. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
5103 |
|
|
`multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
|
5104 |
|
|
file. All GOT references from a single input object file access the
|
5105 |
|
|
same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
|
5106 |
|
|
different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
5107 |
|
|
|
5108 |
|
|
|
5109 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MMIX, Next: MSP430, Prev: M68K, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5110 |
|
|
|
5111 |
|
|
4.7 `ld' and MMIX
|
5112 |
|
|
=================
|
5113 |
|
|
|
5114 |
|
|
For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
|
5115 |
|
|
object files when linking. The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
|
5116 |
|
|
format. The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
|
5117 |
|
|
formats.
|
5118 |
|
|
|
5119 |
|
|
There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
|
5120 |
|
|
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
|
5121 |
|
|
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
|
5122 |
|
|
symbols, equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
|
5123 |
|
|
`.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
|
5124 |
|
|
register multiplied by 8. Register `$255' is not included in this
|
5125 |
|
|
section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
|
5126 |
|
|
`Main' for `mmo' files.
|
5127 |
|
|
|
5128 |
|
|
Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
|
5129 |
|
|
`__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special. The
|
5130 |
|
|
default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
|
5131 |
|
|
section.
|
5132 |
|
|
|
5133 |
|
|
Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
|
5134 |
|
|
section, are left out from an mmo file.
|
5135 |
|
|
|
5136 |
|
|
|
5137 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MSP430, Next: M68HC11/68HC12, Prev: MMIX, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5138 |
|
|
|
5139 |
|
|
4.8 `ld' and MSP430
|
5140 |
|
|
===================
|
5141 |
|
|
|
5142 |
|
|
For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag
|
5143 |
|
|
`-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
|
5144 |
|
|
MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
|
5145 |
|
|
the linker).
|
5146 |
|
|
|
5147 |
|
|
The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
|
5148 |
|
|
specific:
|
5149 |
|
|
|
5150 |
|
|
``.vectors''
|
5151 |
|
|
Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
|
5152 |
|
|
|
5153 |
|
|
``.bootloader''
|
5154 |
|
|
Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any
|
5155 |
|
|
code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
5156 |
|
|
|
5157 |
|
|
``.infomem''
|
5158 |
|
|
Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
|
5159 |
|
|
this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
5160 |
|
|
|
5161 |
|
|
``.infomemnobits''
|
5162 |
|
|
This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
|
5163 |
|
|
this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
|
5164 |
|
|
|
5165 |
|
|
``.noinit''
|
5166 |
|
|
Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
|
5167 |
|
|
|
5168 |
|
|
The last two sections are used by gcc.
|
5169 |
|
|
|
5170 |
|
|
|
5171 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC ELF32, Next: PowerPC64 ELF64, Prev: M68HC11/68HC12, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5172 |
|
|
|
5173 |
|
|
4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
5174 |
|
|
=======================================
|
5175 |
|
|
|
5176 |
|
|
Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
|
5177 |
|
|
displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
|
5178 |
|
|
fit' errors with very large programs. `--relax' enables the generation
|
5179 |
|
|
of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space. These
|
5180 |
|
|
trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
|
5181 |
|
|
be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine
|
5182 |
|
|
`-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
|
5183 |
|
|
both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
|
5184 |
|
|
considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
|
5185 |
|
|
|
5186 |
|
|
`--bss-plt'
|
5187 |
|
|
Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
|
5188 |
|
|
code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
|
5189 |
|
|
security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
|
5190 |
|
|
writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
|
5191 |
|
|
`ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
|
5192 |
|
|
if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
|
5193 |
|
|
compiled with `-msecure-plt'. `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
|
5194 |
|
|
(and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
|
5195 |
|
|
|
5196 |
|
|
`--secure-plt'
|
5197 |
|
|
`ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
|
5198 |
|
|
`-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
|
5199 |
|
|
linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
|
5200 |
|
|
layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the
|
5201 |
|
|
old style BSS PLT.
|
5202 |
|
|
|
5203 |
|
|
`--sdata-got'
|
5204 |
|
|
The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
|
5205 |
|
|
sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The
|
5206 |
|
|
location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
|
5207 |
|
|
initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The
|
5208 |
|
|
reason for the `.got' change is more subtle: The new placement
|
5209 |
|
|
allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
|
5210 |
|
|
relro -z now'. However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
|
5211 |
|
|
always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
|
5212 |
|
|
accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
|
5213 |
|
|
`--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC GCC doesn't
|
5214 |
|
|
use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
|
5215 |
|
|
useful for other compilers that may do so.
|
5216 |
|
|
|
5217 |
|
|
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
5218 |
|
|
This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
5219 |
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
5220 |
|
|
|
5221 |
|
|
`--no-tls-optimize'
|
5222 |
|
|
PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
|
5223 |
|
|
used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to disable
|
5224 |
|
|
the optimization.
|
5225 |
|
|
|
5226 |
|
|
|
5227 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC64 ELF64, Next: SPU ELF, Prev: PowerPC ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5228 |
|
|
|
5229 |
|
|
4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
5230 |
|
|
==========================================
|
5231 |
|
|
|
5232 |
|
|
`--stub-group-size'
|
5233 |
|
|
Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are
|
5234 |
|
|
placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
|
5235 |
|
|
sections. `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
|
5236 |
|
|
group of input sections handled by one stub section. Since branch
|
5237 |
|
|
offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
|
5238 |
|
|
sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
|
5239 |
|
|
it. However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
|
5240 |
|
|
it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
|
5241 |
|
|
serve one group of input sections. A negative value for `N'
|
5242 |
|
|
chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
|
5243 |
|
|
negative offset. Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
|
5244 |
|
|
and `-1'. These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
|
5245 |
|
|
section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
|
5246 |
|
|
behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
|
5247 |
|
|
values of `N' respectively.
|
5248 |
|
|
|
5249 |
|
|
Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
5250 |
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of
|
5251 |
|
|
course create a larger group (of one section). If input sections
|
5252 |
|
|
are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
|
5253 |
|
|
stub.
|
5254 |
|
|
|
5255 |
|
|
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
5256 |
|
|
This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
5257 |
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
5258 |
|
|
|
5259 |
|
|
`--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
|
5260 |
|
|
These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
|
5261 |
|
|
a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
|
5262 |
|
|
function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
|
5263 |
|
|
a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.'). To
|
5264 |
|
|
properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
|
5265 |
|
|
to control both `foo' and `.foo'. The option `--dotsyms', on by
|
5266 |
|
|
default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
|
5267 |
|
|
Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
|
5268 |
|
|
|
5269 |
|
|
`--no-tls-optimize'
|
5270 |
|
|
PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
|
5271 |
|
|
sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
|
5272 |
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
5273 |
|
|
|
5274 |
|
|
`--no-opd-optimize'
|
5275 |
|
|
PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
|
5276 |
|
|
corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
|
5277 |
|
|
by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
|
5278 |
|
|
Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
|
5279 |
|
|
|
5280 |
|
|
`--non-overlapping-opd'
|
5281 |
|
|
Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
|
5282 |
|
|
`.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
|
5283 |
|
|
the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
|
5284 |
|
|
next entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
|
5285 |
|
|
|
5286 |
|
|
`--no-toc-optimize'
|
5287 |
|
|
PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
|
5288 |
|
|
Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
|
5289 |
|
|
the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section marks
|
5290 |
|
|
a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
|
5291 |
|
|
a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
|
5292 |
|
|
relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
|
5293 |
|
|
unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
|
5294 |
|
|
reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
|
5295 |
|
|
discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
|
5296 |
|
|
reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
|
5297 |
|
|
assembly code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to
|
5298 |
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
5299 |
|
|
|
5300 |
|
|
`--no-multi-toc'
|
5301 |
|
|
By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
|
5302 |
|
|
entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
|
5303 |
|
|
total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
|
5304 |
|
|
grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
|
5305 |
|
|
its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
|
5306 |
|
|
inter-group calls. `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
|
5307 |
|
|
cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
|
5308 |
|
|
exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
|
5309 |
|
|
Use this option to turn off this feature.
|
5310 |
|
|
|
5311 |
|
|
|
5312 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: SPU ELF, Next: TI COFF, Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5313 |
|
|
|
5314 |
|
|
4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
5315 |
|
|
=============================
|
5316 |
|
|
|
5317 |
|
|
`--plugin'
|
5318 |
|
|
This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
|
5319 |
|
|
|
5320 |
|
|
`--no-overlays'
|
5321 |
|
|
Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
|
5322 |
|
|
regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
|
5323 |
|
|
`ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option turns
|
5324 |
|
|
off all this special overlay handling.
|
5325 |
|
|
|
5326 |
|
|
`--emit-stub-syms'
|
5327 |
|
|
This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
|
5328 |
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
5329 |
|
|
|
5330 |
|
|
`--extra-overlay-stubs'
|
5331 |
|
|
This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
|
5332 |
|
|
calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added on
|
5333 |
|
|
calls to non-overlay regions.
|
5334 |
|
|
|
5335 |
|
|
`--local-store=lo:hi'
|
5336 |
|
|
`ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
|
5337 |
|
|
address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
|
5338 |
|
|
range. Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
|
5339 |
|
|
|
5340 |
|
|
`--stack-analysis'
|
5341 |
|
|
SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
|
5342 |
|
|
unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
|
5343 |
|
|
under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this
|
5344 |
|
|
option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
|
5345 |
|
|
`ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
|
5346 |
|
|
the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
|
5347 |
|
|
stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
|
5348 |
|
|
for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
|
5349 |
|
|
for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
|
5350 |
|
|
find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
|
5351 |
|
|
recursion and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
|
5352 |
|
|
under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage
|
5353 |
|
|
for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a
|
5354 |
|
|
link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
|
5355 |
|
|
stack usage and calls will be given.
|
5356 |
|
|
|
5357 |
|
|
`--emit-stack-syms'
|
5358 |
|
|
This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
|
5359 |
|
|
`ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function. These take
|
5360 |
|
|
the form `__stack_' for global functions, and
|
5361 |
|
|
`__stack__' for static functions.
|
5362 |
|
|
`' is the section id in hex. The value of such symbols is
|
5363 |
|
|
the stack requirement for the corresponding function. The symbol
|
5364 |
|
|
size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
|
5365 |
|
|
section `SHN_ABS'.
|
5366 |
|
|
|
5367 |
|
|
|
5368 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: TI COFF, Next: WIN32, Prev: SPU ELF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5369 |
|
|
|
5370 |
|
|
4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
|
5371 |
|
|
================================================
|
5372 |
|
|
|
5373 |
|
|
The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
|
5374 |
|
|
versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
|
5375 |
|
|
supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
|
5376 |
|
|
`ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
|
5377 |
|
|
depends on the default specified by the specific target.
|
5378 |
|
|
|
5379 |
|
|
|
5380 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: WIN32, Next: Xtensa, Prev: TI COFF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5381 |
|
|
|
5382 |
|
|
4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
5383 |
|
|
==================================
|
5384 |
|
|
|
5385 |
|
|
This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues. See
|
5386 |
|
|
*Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
|
5387 |
|
|
command line options mentioned here.
|
5388 |
|
|
|
5389 |
|
|
_import libraries_
|
5390 |
|
|
The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
|
5391 |
|
|
libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They
|
5392 |
|
|
are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
|
5393 |
|
|
archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
|
5394 |
|
|
for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
|
5395 |
|
|
command line option.
|
5396 |
|
|
|
5397 |
|
|
_exporting DLL symbols_
|
5398 |
|
|
The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
|
5399 |
|
|
|
5400 |
|
|
_using auto-export functionality_
|
5401 |
|
|
By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
|
5402 |
|
|
functionality, which is controlled by the following command
|
5403 |
|
|
line options:
|
5404 |
|
|
|
5405 |
|
|
* -export-all-symbols [This is the default]
|
5406 |
|
|
|
5407 |
|
|
* -exclude-symbols
|
5408 |
|
|
|
5409 |
|
|
* -exclude-libs
|
5410 |
|
|
|
5411 |
|
|
* -exclude-modules-for-implib
|
5412 |
|
|
|
5413 |
|
|
* -version-script
|
5414 |
|
|
|
5415 |
|
|
When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
|
5416 |
|
|
non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
|
5417 |
|
|
the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
|
5418 |
|
|
system's runtime and libraries. As it will often not be
|
5419 |
|
|
desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
|
5420 |
|
|
private functions that are not part of any public interface,
|
5421 |
|
|
the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
|
5422 |
|
|
symbols out from the list for exporting. The `--output-def'
|
5423 |
|
|
option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
|
5424 |
|
|
symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
|
5425 |
|
|
|
5426 |
|
|
If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
|
5427 |
|
|
command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
|
5428 |
|
|
_disabled_ if either of the following are true:
|
5429 |
|
|
|
5430 |
|
|
* A DEF file is used.
|
5431 |
|
|
|
5432 |
|
|
* Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
|
5433 |
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) attribute.
|
5434 |
|
|
|
5435 |
|
|
_using a DEF file_
|
5436 |
|
|
Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF
|
5437 |
|
|
file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
|
5438 |
|
|
should be exported when a dll is created. Usually it is
|
5439 |
|
|
named `.def' and is added as any other object file
|
5440 |
|
|
to the linker's command line. The file's name must end in
|
5441 |
|
|
`.def' or `.DEF'.
|
5442 |
|
|
|
5443 |
|
|
gcc -o
|
5444 |
|
|
|
5445 |
|
|
Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
|
5446 |
|
|
unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
|
5447 |
|
|
|
5448 |
|
|
Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
|
5449 |
|
|
`xyz.dll':
|
5450 |
|
|
|
5451 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
|
5452 |
|
|
|
5453 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
5454 |
|
|
foo
|
5455 |
|
|
bar
|
5456 |
|
|
_bar = bar
|
5457 |
|
|
another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
|
5458 |
|
|
var1 DATA
|
5459 |
|
|
|
5460 |
|
|
This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
|
5461 |
|
|
and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
|
5462 |
|
|
symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
|
5463 |
|
|
`another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
|
5464 |
|
|
and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
|
5465 |
|
|
`abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
|
5466 |
|
|
object.
|
5467 |
|
|
|
5468 |
|
|
The optional `LIBRARY ' command indicates the _internal_
|
5469 |
|
|
name of the output DLL. If `' does not include a suffix,
|
5470 |
|
|
the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
|
5471 |
|
|
|
5472 |
|
|
When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
|
5473 |
|
|
than a library, the `NAME ' command should be used
|
5474 |
|
|
instead of `LIBRARY'. If `' does not include a suffix,
|
5475 |
|
|
the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
|
5476 |
|
|
|
5477 |
|
|
With either `LIBRARY ' or `NAME ' the optional
|
5478 |
|
|
specification `BASE = ' may be used to specify a
|
5479 |
|
|
non-default base address for the image.
|
5480 |
|
|
|
5481 |
|
|
If neither `LIBRARY ' nor `NAME ' is specified,
|
5482 |
|
|
or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
|
5483 |
|
|
same as the filename specified on the command line.
|
5484 |
|
|
|
5485 |
|
|
The complete specification of an export symbol is:
|
5486 |
|
|
|
5487 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
5488 |
|
|
( ( ( [ = ] )
|
5489 |
|
|
| ( = . ))
|
5490 |
|
|
[ @ ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
|
5491 |
|
|
|
5492 |
|
|
Declares `' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
|
5493 |
|
|
declares `' as an exported alias for `'; or
|
5494 |
|
|
declares `' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
|
5495 |
|
|
`' in the DLL `'. Optionally,
|
5496 |
|
|
the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
|
5497 |
|
|
`' alias.
|
5498 |
|
|
|
5499 |
|
|
The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
|
5500 |
|
|
|
5501 |
|
|
`NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
|
5502 |
|
|
table. It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
|
5503 |
|
|
(either the value specified by the .def specification or,
|
5504 |
|
|
otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
|
5505 |
|
|
name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
|
5506 |
|
|
any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
|
5507 |
|
|
|
5508 |
|
|
`DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
|
5509 |
|
|
function. The import lib will export only an indirect
|
5510 |
|
|
reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
|
5511 |
|
|
be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
|
5512 |
|
|
|
5513 |
|
|
`CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
|
5514 |
|
|
well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
|
5515 |
|
|
read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
|
5516 |
|
|
to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
|
5517 |
|
|
code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
|
5518 |
|
|
explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
|
5519 |
|
|
attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
|
5520 |
|
|
|
5521 |
|
|
`PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
|
5522 |
|
|
not put it into the static import library used to resolve
|
5523 |
|
|
imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
|
5524 |
|
|
the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
|
5525 |
|
|
using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
|
5526 |
|
|
without an import library.
|
5527 |
|
|
|
5528 |
|
|
See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
|
5529 |
|
|
specification of other DEF file statements
|
5530 |
|
|
|
5531 |
|
|
While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
|
5532 |
|
|
with the `--output-def ' command line option.
|
5533 |
|
|
|
5534 |
|
|
_Using decorations_
|
5535 |
|
|
Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
|
5536 |
|
|
source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
|
5537 |
|
|
to be exported is declared as:
|
5538 |
|
|
|
5539 |
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
|
5540 |
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
5541 |
|
|
|
5542 |
|
|
All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
|
5543 |
|
|
any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
|
5544 |
|
|
in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
|
5545 |
|
|
disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
|
5546 |
|
|
used.
|
5547 |
|
|
|
5548 |
|
|
Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
|
5549 |
|
|
_not_ decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use
|
5550 |
|
|
dllimport, instead:
|
5551 |
|
|
|
5552 |
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
|
5553 |
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
5554 |
|
|
|
5555 |
|
|
This complicates the structure of library header files,
|
5556 |
|
|
because when included by the library itself the header must
|
5557 |
|
|
declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
|
5558 |
|
|
included by client code the header must declare them as
|
5559 |
|
|
dllimport. There are a number of idioms that are typically
|
5560 |
|
|
used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
|
5561 |
|
|
declaration completely. See `--enable-auto-import' and
|
5562 |
|
|
`automatic data imports' for more information.
|
5563 |
|
|
|
5564 |
|
|
_automatic data imports_
|
5565 |
|
|
The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
|
5566 |
|
|
only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
|
5567 |
|
|
let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
|
5568 |
|
|
with this issue. This increases the effort necessary to port
|
5569 |
|
|
existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
|
5570 |
|
|
libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
|
5571 |
|
|
initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
|
5572 |
|
|
decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
|
5573 |
|
|
POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
|
5574 |
|
|
`--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
|
5575 |
|
|
by default on cygwin/mingw. The `--enable-auto-import' option
|
5576 |
|
|
itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
|
5577 |
|
|
ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
|
5578 |
|
|
|
5579 |
|
|
auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
|
5580 |
|
|
additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
|
5581 |
|
|
|
5582 |
|
|
"variable '' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
5583 |
|
|
documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
5584 |
|
|
|
5585 |
|
|
The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
|
5586 |
|
|
occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
|
5587 |
|
|
difficulty. One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
|
5588 |
|
|
feature, described below.
|
5589 |
|
|
|
5590 |
|
|
For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
|
5591 |
|
|
classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
|
5592 |
|
|
variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
|
5593 |
|
|
particular field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately,
|
5594 |
|
|
the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
|
5595 |
|
|
fixing these references at runtime without the additional
|
5596 |
|
|
information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations. The
|
5597 |
|
|
standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
|
5598 |
|
|
these references.
|
5599 |
|
|
|
5600 |
|
|
The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
|
5601 |
|
|
references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
|
5602 |
|
|
adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
|
5603 |
|
|
to specialized code provided by the runtime environment. Recent
|
5604 |
|
|
versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
|
5605 |
|
|
provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
|
5606 |
|
|
support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
|
5607 |
|
|
compiled result will run without error on an older system.
|
5608 |
|
|
|
5609 |
|
|
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
|
5610 |
|
|
explicitly enabled as needed.
|
5611 |
|
|
|
5612 |
|
|
_direct linking to a dll_
|
5613 |
|
|
The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
|
5614 |
|
|
including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
|
5615 |
|
|
libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than
|
5616 |
|
|
does the traditional import library method, especially when
|
5617 |
|
|
linking large libraries or applications. When `ld' creates an
|
5618 |
|
|
import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
|
5619 |
|
|
stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
|
5620 |
|
|
exports. The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
|
5621 |
|
|
processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
|
5622 |
|
|
tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
|
5623 |
|
|
particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
|
5624 |
|
|
|
5625 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
|
5626 |
|
|
other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
|
5627 |
|
|
number of names to match each library. All that is needed from
|
5628 |
|
|
the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
|
5629 |
|
|
order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
|
5630 |
|
|
|
5631 |
|
|
For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
|
5632 |
|
|
attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
|
5633 |
|
|
|
5634 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a
|
5635 |
|
|
xxx.dll.a
|
5636 |
|
|
libxxx.a
|
5637 |
|
|
xxx.lib
|
5638 |
|
|
cygxxx.dll (*)
|
5639 |
|
|
libxxx.dll
|
5640 |
|
|
xxx.dll
|
5641 |
|
|
|
5642 |
|
|
before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
|
5643 |
|
|
|
5644 |
|
|
(*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
|
5645 |
|
|
`xxx.dll', where `' is set by the `ld' option
|
5646 |
|
|
`--dll-search-prefix='. In the case of cygwin, the
|
5647 |
|
|
standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
|
5648 |
|
|
effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
|
5649 |
|
|
|
5650 |
|
|
Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
|
5651 |
|
|
use other `'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
|
5652 |
|
|
of this feature. It was originally intended to help avoid name
|
5653 |
|
|
conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
|
5654 |
|
|
environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
|
5655 |
|
|
could coexist on the same machine.
|
5656 |
|
|
|
5657 |
|
|
The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
|
5658 |
|
|
applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
|
5659 |
|
|
libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
|
5660 |
|
|
|
5661 |
|
|
bin/
|
5662 |
|
|
cygxxx.dll
|
5663 |
|
|
lib/
|
5664 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
|
5665 |
|
|
libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
|
5666 |
|
|
|
5667 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
|
5668 |
|
|
done two ways:
|
5669 |
|
|
|
5670 |
|
|
1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
|
5671 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
|
5672 |
|
|
|
5673 |
|
|
However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
|
5674 |
|
|
names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
|
5675 |
|
|
specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version. Import
|
5676 |
|
|
libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
|
5677 |
|
|
|
5678 |
|
|
2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
|
5679 |
|
|
directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
|
5680 |
|
|
should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
|
5681 |
|
|
making the app/dll.
|
5682 |
|
|
|
5683 |
|
|
ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
|
5684 |
|
|
|
5685 |
|
|
Then you can link without any make environment changes.
|
5686 |
|
|
|
5687 |
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
|
5688 |
|
|
|
5689 |
|
|
This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
|
5690 |
|
|
the following is perfectly legal
|
5691 |
|
|
|
5692 |
|
|
bin/
|
5693 |
|
|
cygxxx-5.dll
|
5694 |
|
|
lib/
|
5695 |
|
|
libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
|
5696 |
|
|
|
5697 |
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
|
5698 |
|
|
even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
|
5699 |
|
|
`--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
|
5700 |
|
|
|
5701 |
|
|
Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
|
5702 |
|
|
justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all. There
|
5703 |
|
|
are three reasons:
|
5704 |
|
|
|
5705 |
|
|
1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
|
5706 |
|
|
work with auto-imported data.
|
5707 |
|
|
|
5708 |
|
|
2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
|
5709 |
|
|
the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
|
5710 |
|
|
indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again,
|
5711 |
|
|
the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
|
5712 |
|
|
and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
|
5713 |
|
|
|
5714 |
|
|
3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This
|
5715 |
|
|
is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
|
5716 |
|
|
API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
|
5717 |
|
|
of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
|
5718 |
|
|
|
5719 |
|
|
So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
|
5720 |
|
|
true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
|
5721 |
|
|
dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
|
5722 |
|
|
binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
|
5723 |
|
|
massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
|
5724 |
|
|
requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
|
5725 |
|
|
will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
|
5726 |
|
|
|
5727 |
|
|
_symbol aliasing_
|
5728 |
|
|
|
5729 |
|
|
_adding additional names_
|
5730 |
|
|
Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
|
5731 |
|
|
names. A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
|
5732 |
|
|
also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
|
5733 |
|
|
DEF file when creating the dll. This will affect also the
|
5734 |
|
|
optional created import library. Consider the following DEF
|
5735 |
|
|
file:
|
5736 |
|
|
|
5737 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
5738 |
|
|
|
5739 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
5740 |
|
|
foo
|
5741 |
|
|
_foo = foo
|
5742 |
|
|
|
5743 |
|
|
The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
|
5744 |
|
|
|
5745 |
|
|
Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
|
5746 |
|
|
the source code using the "weak" attribute:
|
5747 |
|
|
|
5748 |
|
|
void foo () { /* Do something. */; }
|
5749 |
|
|
void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
|
5750 |
|
|
|
5751 |
|
|
See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
|
5752 |
|
|
weak symbols.
|
5753 |
|
|
|
5754 |
|
|
_renaming symbols_
|
5755 |
|
|
Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the
|
5756 |
|
|
cygwin kernel does this regularly. A symbol `_foo' can be
|
5757 |
|
|
exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
|
5758 |
|
|
directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
|
5759 |
|
|
library, if it is created). In the following example:
|
5760 |
|
|
|
5761 |
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
5762 |
|
|
|
5763 |
|
|
EXPORTS
|
5764 |
|
|
_foo = foo
|
5765 |
|
|
|
5766 |
|
|
The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
|
5767 |
|
|
`_foo'.
|
5768 |
|
|
|
5769 |
|
|
Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
|
5770 |
|
|
unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
|
5771 |
|
|
If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
|
5772 |
|
|
_all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
|
5773 |
|
|
are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
|
5774 |
|
|
option. If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
|
5775 |
|
|
use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
|
5776 |
|
|
both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
|
5777 |
|
|
symbols will be exported. In effect, you'd be aliasing those
|
5778 |
|
|
symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
|
5779 |
|
|
|
5780 |
|
|
_weak externals_
|
5781 |
|
|
The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
|
5782 |
|
|
called weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the
|
5783 |
|
|
symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
|
5784 |
|
|
other symbol. There are three variants of weak externals:
|
5785 |
|
|
* Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
|
5786 |
|
|
historically called lazy externals.
|
5787 |
|
|
|
5788 |
|
|
* Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
|
5789 |
|
|
libraries. This form is not presently implemented.
|
5790 |
|
|
|
5791 |
|
|
* No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
|
5792 |
|
|
implemented.
|
5793 |
|
|
As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
|
5794 |
|
|
symbol are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking,
|
5795 |
|
|
the symbol uses a default value.
|
5796 |
|
|
|
5797 |
|
|
_aligned common symbols_
|
5798 |
|
|
As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
|
5799 |
|
|
specify the desired alignment for a common symbol. This
|
5800 |
|
|
information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
|
5801 |
|
|
linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
|
5802 |
|
|
file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
|
5803 |
|
|
respected when laying out the common symbols. Native tools will
|
5804 |
|
|
be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
|
5805 |
|
|
will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
|
5806 |
|
|
noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
|
5807 |
|
|
|
5808 |
|
|
|
5809 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Xtensa, Prev: WIN32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
5810 |
|
|
|
5811 |
|
|
4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
5812 |
|
|
===============================
|
5813 |
|
|
|
5814 |
|
|
The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
|
5815 |
|
|
`SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
|
5816 |
|
|
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
|
5817 |
|
|
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
|
5818 |
|
|
example, with the command:
|
5819 |
|
|
|
5820 |
|
|
SECTIONS
|
5821 |
|
|
{
|
5822 |
|
|
.text : {
|
5823 |
|
|
*(.literal .text)
|
5824 |
|
|
}
|
5825 |
|
|
}
|
5826 |
|
|
|
5827 |
|
|
`ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
|
5828 |
|
|
different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
|
5829 |
|
|
range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid interleaving might place
|
5830 |
|
|
the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
|
5831 |
|
|
`.text' sections of that group of files. Then, the `.literal' sections
|
5832 |
|
|
from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
|
5833 |
|
|
the files would follow.
|
5834 |
|
|
|
5835 |
|
|
Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
|
5836 |
|
|
provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
|
5837 |
|
|
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
|
5838 |
|
|
literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
|
5839 |
|
|
will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
|
5840 |
|
|
location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
|
5841 |
|
|
the `L32R' instructions. The second optimization is to remove
|
5842 |
|
|
unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
|
5843 |
|
|
`L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
|
5844 |
|
|
`CALLN' instructions.
|
5845 |
|
|
|
5846 |
|
|
For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
|
5847 |
|
|
optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
|
5848 |
|
|
instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
|
5849 |
|
|
and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
|
5850 |
|
|
not used for anything else. Removing the `L32R' instruction always
|
5851 |
|
|
reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
|
5852 |
|
|
alignment of subsequent branch targets. By default, the linker will
|
5853 |
|
|
always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
|
5854 |
|
|
between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
|
5855 |
|
|
inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
|
5856 |
|
|
If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
|
5857 |
|
|
option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
|
5858 |
|
|
instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
|
5859 |
|
|
are required for correctness.
|
5860 |
|
|
|
5861 |
|
|
The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
|
5862 |
|
|
control the linker:
|
5863 |
|
|
|
5864 |
|
|
`--no-relax'
|
5865 |
|
|
Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
|
5866 |
|
|
default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
|
5867 |
|
|
|
5868 |
|
|
`--size-opt'
|
5869 |
|
|
When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
|
5870 |
|
|
size more than performance. With this option, the linker will not
|
5871 |
|
|
insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
|
5872 |
|
|
target alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are
|
5873 |
|
|
required to preserve the correctness of the code.
|
5874 |
|
|
|
5875 |
|
|
|
5876 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD, Next: Reporting Bugs, Prev: Machine Dependent, Up: Top
|
5877 |
|
|
|
5878 |
|
|
5 BFD
|
5879 |
|
|
*****
|
5880 |
|
|
|
5881 |
|
|
The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
|
5882 |
|
|
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
|
5883 |
|
|
object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
|
5884 |
|
|
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
|
5885 |
|
|
it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
|
5886 |
|
|
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
|
5887 |
|
|
object file formats available. You can use `objdump -i' (*note
|
5888 |
|
|
objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
|
5889 |
|
|
your configuration.
|
5890 |
|
|
|
5891 |
|
|
As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
|
5892 |
|
|
conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
|
5893 |
|
|
efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
|
5894 |
|
|
would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
|
5895 |
|
|
offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
|
5896 |
|
|
back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
|
5897 |
|
|
greater speed.
|
5898 |
|
|
|
5899 |
|
|
One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
|
5900 |
|
|
is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
|
5901 |
|
|
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
|
5902 |
|
|
conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
|
5903 |
|
|
|
5904 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
5905 |
|
|
|
5906 |
|
|
* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
|
5907 |
|
|
|
5908 |
|
|
|
5909 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD outline, Up: BFD
|
5910 |
|
|
|
5911 |
|
|
5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
|
5912 |
|
|
===================================
|
5913 |
|
|
|
5914 |
|
|
When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
|
5915 |
|
|
the format of the input object file. They then build a descriptor in
|
5916 |
|
|
memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
|
5917 |
|
|
the object file's data structures.
|
5918 |
|
|
|
5919 |
|
|
As different information from the object files is required, BFD
|
5920 |
|
|
reads from different sections of the file and processes them. For
|
5921 |
|
|
example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
|
5922 |
|
|
tables. Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
|
5923 |
|
|
the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
|
5924 |
|
|
format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
|
5925 |
|
|
calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
|
5926 |
|
|
back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form. The
|
5927 |
|
|
linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
|
5928 |
|
|
and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
|
5929 |
|
|
end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
|
5930 |
|
|
convert it into the chosen output format.
|
5931 |
|
|
|
5932 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
5933 |
|
|
|
5934 |
|
|
* BFD information loss:: Information Loss
|
5935 |
|
|
* Canonical format:: The BFD canonical object-file format
|
5936 |
|
|
|
5937 |
|
|
|
5938 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD information loss, Next: Canonical format, Up: BFD outline
|
5939 |
|
|
|
5940 |
|
|
5.1.1 Information Loss
|
5941 |
|
|
----------------------
|
5942 |
|
|
|
5943 |
|
|
_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
|
5944 |
|
|
by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
|
5945 |
|
|
be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
|
5946 |
|
|
example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
|
5947 |
|
|
in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
|
5948 |
|
|
contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
|
5949 |
|
|
image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
|
5950 |
|
|
output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
|
5951 |
|
|
internally, so the link is performed correctly).
|
5952 |
|
|
|
5953 |
|
|
Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
|
5954 |
|
|
unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
|
5955 |
|
|
the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
|
5956 |
|
|
(e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
|
5957 |
|
|
the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
|
5958 |
|
|
describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
|
5959 |
|
|
command language.
|
5960 |
|
|
|
5961 |
|
|
_Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
|
5962 |
|
|
canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
|
5963 |
|
|
structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
|
5964 |
|
|
internally. This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
|
5965 |
|
|
possible data richness through the transformation between external to
|
5966 |
|
|
internal and back to external formats.
|
5967 |
|
|
|
5968 |
|
|
This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
|
5969 |
|
|
format and writes another. Each BFD back end is responsible for
|
5970 |
|
|
maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
|
5971 |
|
|
form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
|
5972 |
|
|
to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
|
5973 |
|
|
is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
|
5974 |
|
|
end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
|
5975 |
|
|
is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
|
5976 |
|
|
able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
|
5977 |
|
|
information it prepared earlier. Since there is a great deal of
|
5978 |
|
|
commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
|
5979 |
|
|
linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
|
5980 |
|
|
`b.out'. When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
|
5981 |
|
|
lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
|
5982 |
|
|
|
5983 |
|
|
|
5984 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Canonical format, Prev: BFD information loss, Up: BFD outline
|
5985 |
|
|
|
5986 |
|
|
5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
|
5987 |
|
|
------------------------------------------
|
5988 |
|
|
|
5989 |
|
|
The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
|
5990 |
|
|
least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
|
5991 |
|
|
that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
|
5992 |
|
|
format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
|
5993 |
|
|
understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
|
5994 |
|
|
conversions.
|
5995 |
|
|
|
5996 |
|
|
_files_
|
5997 |
|
|
Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
|
5998 |
|
|
architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
|
5999 |
|
|
pageable bit, and a write protected bit. Information like Unix
|
6000 |
|
|
magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
|
6001 |
|
|
so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
|
6002 |
|
|
write protected text bit set. The byte order of the target is
|
6003 |
|
|
stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
|
6004 |
|
|
files may be used with one another.
|
6005 |
|
|
|
6006 |
|
|
_sections_
|
6007 |
|
|
Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
|
6008 |
|
|
the section's original address in the object file, size and
|
6009 |
|
|
alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
|
6010 |
|
|
data structures.
|
6011 |
|
|
|
6012 |
|
|
_symbols_
|
6013 |
|
|
Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
|
6014 |
|
|
file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
|
6015 |
|
|
flag bits. When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
|
6016 |
|
|
relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
|
6017 |
|
|
section where they were defined. Doing this ensures that each
|
6018 |
|
|
symbol points to its containing section. Each symbol also has a
|
6019 |
|
|
varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end. Since
|
6020 |
|
|
the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
|
6021 |
|
|
for that symbol is accessible. `ld' can operate on a collection
|
6022 |
|
|
of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
|
6023 |
|
|
|
6024 |
|
|
Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
|
6025 |
|
|
so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
|
6026 |
|
|
pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
|
6027 |
|
|
Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
|
6028 |
|
|
information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
|
6029 |
|
|
This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
|
6030 |
|
|
linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
|
6031 |
|
|
|
6032 |
|
|
There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
|
6033 |
|
|
format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
|
6034 |
|
|
example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
|
6035 |
|
|
within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
|
6036 |
|
|
information will be preserved.
|
6037 |
|
|
|
6038 |
|
|
_relocation level_
|
6039 |
|
|
Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
|
6040 |
|
|
symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
|
6041 |
|
|
section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
|
6042 |
|
|
descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
|
6043 |
|
|
the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
|
6044 |
|
|
relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
|
6045 |
|
|
method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
|
6046 |
|
|
instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format. A relocation
|
6047 |
|
|
record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
|
6048 |
|
|
routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
|
6049 |
|
|
byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
|
6050 |
|
|
such relocation type.
|
6051 |
|
|
|
6052 |
|
|
_line numbers_
|
6053 |
|
|
Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
|
6054 |
|
|
mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
|
6055 |
|
|
output file. These addresses have to be relocated along with the
|
6056 |
|
|
symbol information. Each symbol with an associated list of line
|
6057 |
|
|
number records points to the first record of the list. The head
|
6058 |
|
|
of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
|
6059 |
|
|
allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
|
6060 |
|
|
is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
|
6061 |
|
|
offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
|
6062 |
|
|
simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
|
6063 |
|
|
formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
|
6064 |
|
|
|
6065 |
|
|
|
6066 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Reporting Bugs, Next: MRI, Prev: BFD, Up: Top
|
6067 |
|
|
|
6068 |
|
|
6 Reporting Bugs
|
6069 |
|
|
****************
|
6070 |
|
|
|
6071 |
|
|
Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
|
6072 |
|
|
|
6073 |
|
|
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
|
6074 |
|
|
or it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report
|
6075 |
|
|
is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
|
6076 |
|
|
better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
|
6077 |
|
|
|
6078 |
|
|
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
6079 |
|
|
information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
6080 |
|
|
|
6081 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
6082 |
|
|
|
6083 |
|
|
* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
6084 |
|
|
* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
6085 |
|
|
|
6086 |
|
|
|
6087 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Criteria, Next: Bug Reporting, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
6088 |
|
|
|
6089 |
|
|
6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
|
6090 |
|
|
=========================
|
6091 |
|
|
|
6092 |
|
|
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
|
6093 |
|
|
guidelines:
|
6094 |
|
|
|
6095 |
|
|
* If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
|
6096 |
|
|
a `ld' bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
|
6097 |
|
|
|
6098 |
|
|
* If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
|
6099 |
|
|
|
6100 |
|
|
* If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
|
6101 |
|
|
may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
|
6102 |
|
|
object files are correct.
|
6103 |
|
|
|
6104 |
|
|
* If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
|
6105 |
|
|
improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
|
6106 |
|
|
|
6107 |
|
|
|
6108 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Reporting, Prev: Bug Criteria, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
6109 |
|
|
|
6110 |
|
|
6.2 How to Report Bugs
|
6111 |
|
|
======================
|
6112 |
|
|
|
6113 |
|
|
A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
|
6114 |
|
|
If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
|
6115 |
|
|
contact that organization first.
|
6116 |
|
|
|
6117 |
|
|
You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
6118 |
|
|
individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
|
6119 |
|
|
|
6120 |
|
|
Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
|
6121 |
|
|
`http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
|
6122 |
|
|
|
6123 |
|
|
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
|
6124 |
|
|
*report all the facts*. If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
|
6125 |
|
|
leave it out, state it!
|
6126 |
|
|
|
6127 |
|
|
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
6128 |
|
|
problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
6129 |
|
|
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
|
6130 |
|
|
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug
|
6131 |
|
|
is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
|
6132 |
|
|
where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
|
6133 |
|
|
different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
|
6134 |
|
|
doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
|
6135 |
|
|
specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
|
6136 |
|
|
and the most helpful.
|
6137 |
|
|
|
6138 |
|
|
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
|
6139 |
|
|
the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
|
6140 |
|
|
on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
6141 |
|
|
|
6142 |
|
|
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
|
6143 |
|
|
bell?" This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
6144 |
|
|
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. You
|
6145 |
|
|
might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
6146 |
|
|
|
6147 |
|
|
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
6148 |
|
|
|
6149 |
|
|
* The version of `ld'. `ld' announces it if you start it with the
|
6150 |
|
|
`--version' argument.
|
6151 |
|
|
|
6152 |
|
|
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
|
6153 |
|
|
looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
|
6154 |
|
|
|
6155 |
|
|
* Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
|
6156 |
|
|
patches made to the `BFD' library.
|
6157 |
|
|
|
6158 |
|
|
* The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
|
6159 |
|
|
and version number.
|
6160 |
|
|
|
6161 |
|
|
* What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
|
6162 |
|
|
"`gcc-2.7'".
|
6163 |
|
|
|
6164 |
|
|
* The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
|
6165 |
|
|
observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something
|
6166 |
|
|
important, list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output
|
6167 |
|
|
from make) is sufficient.
|
6168 |
|
|
|
6169 |
|
|
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
|
6170 |
|
|
wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
6171 |
|
|
|
6172 |
|
|
* A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
|
6173 |
|
|
the bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
|
6174 |
|
|
files provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than
|
6175 |
|
|
10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
|
6176 |
|
|
or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
|
6177 |
|
|
file(s) to whomever requests them. (Note - your email will be
|
6178 |
|
|
going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
|
6179 |
|
|
large attachments). But small attachments are best.
|
6180 |
|
|
|
6181 |
|
|
If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
|
6182 |
|
|
`gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
|
6183 |
|
|
object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
|
6184 |
|
|
`gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files. Also say how
|
6185 |
|
|
`gas' or `gcc' were configured.
|
6186 |
|
|
|
6187 |
|
|
* A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
6188 |
|
|
incorrect. For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
|
6189 |
|
|
|
6190 |
|
|
Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
|
6191 |
|
|
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we
|
6192 |
|
|
might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well
|
6193 |
|
|
not give us a chance to make a mistake.
|
6194 |
|
|
|
6195 |
|
|
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
|
6196 |
|
|
still say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on,
|
6197 |
|
|
such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
|
6198 |
|
|
a bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your
|
6199 |
|
|
copy might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a
|
6200 |
|
|
crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
|
6201 |
|
|
was not happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a
|
6202 |
|
|
crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
|
6203 |
|
|
observations.
|
6204 |
|
|
|
6205 |
|
|
* If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
|
6206 |
|
|
diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
|
6207 |
|
|
Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
|
6208 |
|
|
discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
|
6209 |
|
|
by line number.
|
6210 |
|
|
|
6211 |
|
|
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
|
6212 |
|
|
in your sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful
|
6213 |
|
|
information to us.
|
6214 |
|
|
|
6215 |
|
|
Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
6216 |
|
|
|
6217 |
|
|
* A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
6218 |
|
|
|
6219 |
|
|
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
6220 |
|
|
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
6221 |
|
|
changes will not affect it.
|
6222 |
|
|
|
6223 |
|
|
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
|
6224 |
|
|
we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
|
6225 |
|
|
debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
|
6226 |
|
|
examples. We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
6227 |
|
|
|
6228 |
|
|
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
|
6229 |
|
|
of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
6230 |
|
|
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
6231 |
|
|
less time, and so on.
|
6232 |
|
|
|
6233 |
|
|
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
|
6234 |
|
|
this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
|
6235 |
|
|
used.
|
6236 |
|
|
|
6237 |
|
|
* A patch for the bug.
|
6238 |
|
|
|
6239 |
|
|
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not
|
6240 |
|
|
omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
|
6241 |
|
|
assumption that a patch is all we need. We might see problems
|
6242 |
|
|
with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
|
6243 |
|
|
might not understand it at all.
|
6244 |
|
|
|
6245 |
|
|
Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
|
6246 |
|
|
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
|
6247 |
|
|
path through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will
|
6248 |
|
|
not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
|
6249 |
|
|
that the bug is fixed.
|
6250 |
|
|
|
6251 |
|
|
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
|
6252 |
|
|
your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A
|
6253 |
|
|
test case will help us to understand.
|
6254 |
|
|
|
6255 |
|
|
* A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
6256 |
|
|
|
6257 |
|
|
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about
|
6258 |
|
|
such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
6259 |
|
|
|
6260 |
|
|
|
6261 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MRI, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Reporting Bugs, Up: Top
|
6262 |
|
|
|
6263 |
|
|
Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
|
6264 |
|
|
**************************************
|
6265 |
|
|
|
6266 |
|
|
To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
|
6267 |
|
|
`ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
|
6268 |
|
|
more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
|
6269 |
|
|
Scripts::. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
|
6270 |
|
|
set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'. GNU `ld'
|
6271 |
|
|
supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
|
6272 |
|
|
described here.
|
6273 |
|
|
|
6274 |
|
|
In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
|
6275 |
|
|
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
|
6276 |
|
|
features to make use of them.
|
6277 |
|
|
|
6278 |
|
|
You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
|
6279 |
|
|
`-c' command-line option.
|
6280 |
|
|
|
6281 |
|
|
Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
|
6282 |
|
|
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
|
6283 |
|
|
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
|
6284 |
|
|
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
|
6285 |
|
|
a warning message, but continues processing the script.
|
6286 |
|
|
|
6287 |
|
|
Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
|
6288 |
|
|
|
6289 |
|
|
You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
|
6290 |
|
|
lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'. The following
|
6291 |
|
|
list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
|
6292 |
|
|
|
6293 |
|
|
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
|
6294 |
|
|
`ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
6295 |
|
|
Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
|
6296 |
|
|
the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
|
6297 |
|
|
use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
|
6298 |
|
|
present in your output program. If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
|
6299 |
|
|
at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
|
6300 |
|
|
`ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output. You can
|
6301 |
|
|
still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
|
6302 |
|
|
line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
|
6303 |
|
|
|
6304 |
|
|
`ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
|
6305 |
|
|
Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
|
6306 |
|
|
in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
|
6307 |
|
|
|
6308 |
|
|
IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
|
6309 |
|
|
|
6310 |
|
|
`ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
|
6311 |
|
|
Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION. The EXPRESSION
|
6312 |
|
|
should be a power of two.
|
6313 |
|
|
|
6314 |
|
|
`BASE EXPRESSION'
|
6315 |
|
|
Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
|
6316 |
|
|
absolute addresses) in the output file.
|
6317 |
|
|
|
6318 |
|
|
`CHIP EXPRESSION'
|
6319 |
|
|
`CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
|
6320 |
|
|
This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
|
6321 |
|
|
|
6322 |
|
|
`END'
|
6323 |
|
|
This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
|
6324 |
|
|
compatibility.
|
6325 |
|
|
|
6326 |
|
|
`FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
6327 |
|
|
Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
|
6328 |
|
|
language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
|
6329 |
|
|
|
6330 |
|
|
1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
|
6331 |
|
|
|
6332 |
|
|
2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
|
6333 |
|
|
|
6334 |
|
|
3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
|
6335 |
|
|
`COFF'
|
6336 |
|
|
|
6337 |
|
|
`LIST ANYTHING...'
|
6338 |
|
|
Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
|
6339 |
|
|
`ld' command-line option `-M'.
|
6340 |
|
|
|
6341 |
|
|
The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
|
6342 |
|
|
with no change in its effect.
|
6343 |
|
|
|
6344 |
|
|
`LOAD FILENAME'
|
6345 |
|
|
`LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
|
6346 |
|
|
Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
|
6347 |
|
|
same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
|
6348 |
|
|
line.
|
6349 |
|
|
|
6350 |
|
|
`NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
|
6351 |
|
|
OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
|
6352 |
|
|
MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
|
6353 |
|
|
option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
|
6354 |
|
|
|
6355 |
|
|
`ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
6356 |
|
|
`ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
|
6357 |
|
|
Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
|
6358 |
|
|
in which they first appear in the input files. In an
|
6359 |
|
|
MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
|
6360 |
|
|
`ORDER' command. The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
|
6361 |
|
|
first in your output file, in the order specified.
|
6362 |
|
|
|
6363 |
|
|
`PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
|
6364 |
|
|
`PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
|
6365 |
|
|
`PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
|
6366 |
|
|
Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
|
6367 |
|
|
linker input files.
|
6368 |
|
|
|
6369 |
|
|
`SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
|
6370 |
|
|
`SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
|
6371 |
|
|
`SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
|
6372 |
|
|
You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
|
6373 |
|
|
specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME. If
|
6374 |
|
|
you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
|
6375 |
|
|
the _first_ sets the start address.
|
6376 |
|
|
|
6377 |
|
|
|
6378 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: LD Index, Prev: MRI, Up: Top
|
6379 |
|
|
|
6380 |
|
|
Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
|
6381 |
|
|
*****************************************
|
6382 |
|
|
|
6383 |
|
|
Version 1.1, March 2000
|
6384 |
|
|
|
6385 |
|
|
Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
6386 |
|
|
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
|
6387 |
|
|
|
6388 |
|
|
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
6389 |
|
|
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
6390 |
|
|
|
6391 |
|
|
|
6392 |
|
|
0. PREAMBLE
|
6393 |
|
|
|
6394 |
|
|
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
|
6395 |
|
|
written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
|
6396 |
|
|
the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
|
6397 |
|
|
modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily,
|
6398 |
|
|
this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
|
6399 |
|
|
credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
|
6400 |
|
|
modifications made by others.
|
6401 |
|
|
|
6402 |
|
|
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
|
6403 |
|
|
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
|
6404 |
|
|
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
|
6405 |
|
|
license designed for free software.
|
6406 |
|
|
|
6407 |
|
|
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
|
6408 |
|
|
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
|
6409 |
|
|
free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
|
6410 |
|
|
that the software does. But this License is not limited to
|
6411 |
|
|
software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
|
6412 |
|
|
of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
|
6413 |
|
|
We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
|
6414 |
|
|
instruction or reference.
|
6415 |
|
|
|
6416 |
|
|
|
6417 |
|
|
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
|
6418 |
|
|
|
6419 |
|
|
This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
|
6420 |
|
|
notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
|
6421 |
|
|
under the terms of this License. The "Document", below, refers to
|
6422 |
|
|
any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee,
|
6423 |
|
|
and is addressed as "you."
|
6424 |
|
|
|
6425 |
|
|
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
|
6426 |
|
|
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
|
6427 |
|
|
modifications and/or translated into another language.
|
6428 |
|
|
|
6429 |
|
|
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
|
6430 |
|
|
section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
|
6431 |
|
|
relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
|
6432 |
|
|
Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
|
6433 |
|
|
nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
|
6434 |
|
|
(For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
|
6435 |
|
|
mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
|
6436 |
|
|
The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
|
6437 |
|
|
the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
|
6438 |
|
|
philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
|
6439 |
|
|
|
6440 |
|
|
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
|
6441 |
|
|
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
|
6442 |
|
|
the notice that says that the Document is released under this
|
6443 |
|
|
License.
|
6444 |
|
|
|
6445 |
|
|
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
|
6446 |
|
|
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
|
6447 |
|
|
that says that the Document is released under this License.
|
6448 |
|
|
|
6449 |
|
|
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
|
6450 |
|
|
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
|
6451 |
|
|
general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
|
6452 |
|
|
and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
|
6453 |
|
|
composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
|
6454 |
|
|
widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
|
6455 |
|
|
text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
|
6456 |
|
|
formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an
|
6457 |
|
|
otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
|
6458 |
|
|
to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
|
6459 |
|
|
Transparent. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
|
6460 |
|
|
|
6461 |
|
|
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
|
6462 |
|
|
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
|
6463 |
|
|
SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
|
6464 |
|
|
standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
|
6465 |
|
|
Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
|
6466 |
|
|
can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
|
6467 |
|
|
or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
|
6468 |
|
|
available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
|
6469 |
|
|
processors for output purposes only.
|
6470 |
|
|
|
6471 |
|
|
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
|
6472 |
|
|
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
|
6473 |
|
|
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
|
6474 |
|
|
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
|
6475 |
|
|
Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
|
6476 |
|
|
work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
|
6477 |
|
|
|
6478 |
|
|
2. VERBATIM COPYING
|
6479 |
|
|
|
6480 |
|
|
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
|
6481 |
|
|
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
|
6482 |
|
|
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
|
6483 |
|
|
applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
|
6484 |
|
|
add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You
|
6485 |
|
|
may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
|
6486 |
|
|
or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However,
|
6487 |
|
|
you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you
|
6488 |
|
|
distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
|
6489 |
|
|
the conditions in section 3.
|
6490 |
|
|
|
6491 |
|
|
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
|
6492 |
|
|
and you may publicly display copies.
|
6493 |
|
|
|
6494 |
|
|
3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
|
6495 |
|
|
|
6496 |
|
|
If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
|
6497 |
|
|
100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
|
6498 |
|
|
must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
|
6499 |
|
|
all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
|
6500 |
|
|
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
|
6501 |
|
|
and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The
|
6502 |
|
|
front cover must present the full title with all words of the
|
6503 |
|
|
title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material
|
6504 |
|
|
on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the
|
6505 |
|
|
covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
|
6506 |
|
|
satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
|
6507 |
|
|
other respects.
|
6508 |
|
|
|
6509 |
|
|
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
|
6510 |
|
|
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
|
6511 |
|
|
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
|
6512 |
|
|
adjacent pages.
|
6513 |
|
|
|
6514 |
|
|
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
|
6515 |
|
|
numbering more than 100, you must either include a
|
6516 |
|
|
machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
|
6517 |
|
|
state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
|
6518 |
|
|
computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
|
6519 |
|
|
of the Document, free of added material, which the general
|
6520 |
|
|
network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
|
6521 |
|
|
charge using public-standard network protocols. If you use the
|
6522 |
|
|
latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
|
6523 |
|
|
begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
|
6524 |
|
|
this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
|
6525 |
|
|
location until at least one year after the last time you
|
6526 |
|
|
distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
|
6527 |
|
|
retailers) of that edition to the public.
|
6528 |
|
|
|
6529 |
|
|
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
|
6530 |
|
|
the Document well before redistributing any large number of
|
6531 |
|
|
copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
|
6532 |
|
|
version of the Document.
|
6533 |
|
|
|
6534 |
|
|
4. MODIFICATIONS
|
6535 |
|
|
|
6536 |
|
|
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
|
6537 |
|
|
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
|
6538 |
|
|
release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
|
6539 |
|
|
the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
|
6540 |
|
|
licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
|
6541 |
|
|
whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these
|
6542 |
|
|
things in the Modified Version:
|
6543 |
|
|
|
6544 |
|
|
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
|
6545 |
|
|
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
|
6546 |
|
|
versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
|
6547 |
|
|
History section of the Document). You may use the same title
|
6548 |
|
|
as a previous version if the original publisher of that version
|
6549 |
|
|
gives permission.
|
6550 |
|
|
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
|
6551 |
|
|
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
|
6552 |
|
|
Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal
|
6553 |
|
|
authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it
|
6554 |
|
|
has less than five).
|
6555 |
|
|
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
|
6556 |
|
|
Modified Version, as the publisher.
|
6557 |
|
|
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
|
6558 |
|
|
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
|
6559 |
|
|
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
|
6560 |
|
|
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
|
6561 |
|
|
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
|
6562 |
|
|
under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the
|
6563 |
|
|
Addendum below.
|
6564 |
|
|
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
|
6565 |
|
|
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
|
6566 |
|
|
license notice.
|
6567 |
|
|
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
|
6568 |
|
|
I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
|
6569 |
|
|
to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
|
6570 |
|
|
publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
|
6571 |
|
|
If there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
|
6572 |
|
|
create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
|
6573 |
|
|
the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item
|
6574 |
|
|
describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous
|
6575 |
|
|
sentence.
|
6576 |
|
|
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
|
6577 |
|
|
public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
|
6578 |
|
|
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
|
6579 |
|
|
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
|
6580 |
|
|
"History" section. You may omit a network location for a work
|
6581 |
|
|
that was published at least four years before the Document
|
6582 |
|
|
itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
|
6583 |
|
|
to gives permission.
|
6584 |
|
|
K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
|
6585 |
|
|
preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
|
6586 |
|
|
substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
|
6587 |
|
|
and/or dedications given therein.
|
6588 |
|
|
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
|
6589 |
|
|
unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
|
6590 |
|
|
or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
|
6591 |
|
|
M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements." Such a section
|
6592 |
|
|
may not be included in the Modified Version.
|
6593 |
|
|
N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements" or to
|
6594 |
|
|
conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
|
6595 |
|
|
|
6596 |
|
|
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
|
6597 |
|
|
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
|
6598 |
|
|
material copied from the Document, you may at your option
|
6599 |
|
|
designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this,
|
6600 |
|
|
add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
|
6601 |
|
|
Version's license notice. These titles must be distinct from any
|
6602 |
|
|
other section titles.
|
6603 |
|
|
|
6604 |
|
|
You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
|
6605 |
|
|
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
|
6606 |
|
|
parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
|
6607 |
|
|
been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
|
6608 |
|
|
of a standard.
|
6609 |
|
|
|
6610 |
|
|
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
|
6611 |
|
|
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
|
6612 |
|
|
of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one
|
6613 |
|
|
passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
|
6614 |
|
|
added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the
|
6615 |
|
|
Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
|
6616 |
|
|
previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
|
6617 |
|
|
you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
|
6618 |
|
|
replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
|
6619 |
|
|
publisher that added the old one.
|
6620 |
|
|
|
6621 |
|
|
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
|
6622 |
|
|
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
|
6623 |
|
|
assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
|
6624 |
|
|
|
6625 |
|
|
5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
|
6626 |
|
|
|
6627 |
|
|
You may combine the Document with other documents released under
|
6628 |
|
|
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
|
6629 |
|
|
modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
|
6630 |
|
|
all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
|
6631 |
|
|
unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
|
6632 |
|
|
combined work in its license notice.
|
6633 |
|
|
|
6634 |
|
|
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
|
6635 |
|
|
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
|
6636 |
|
|
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
|
6637 |
|
|
but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
|
6638 |
|
|
by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
|
6639 |
|
|
original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
|
6640 |
|
|
unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
|
6641 |
|
|
the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
|
6642 |
|
|
combined work.
|
6643 |
|
|
|
6644 |
|
|
In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
|
6645 |
|
|
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section
|
6646 |
|
|
entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
|
6647 |
|
|
"Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications." You
|
6648 |
|
|
must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
|
6649 |
|
|
|
6650 |
|
|
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
|
6651 |
|
|
|
6652 |
|
|
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
|
6653 |
|
|
documents released under this License, and replace the individual
|
6654 |
|
|
copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
|
6655 |
|
|
that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
|
6656 |
|
|
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
|
6657 |
|
|
documents in all other respects.
|
6658 |
|
|
|
6659 |
|
|
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
|
6660 |
|
|
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
|
6661 |
|
|
a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
|
6662 |
|
|
this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
|
6663 |
|
|
that document.
|
6664 |
|
|
|
6665 |
|
|
7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
|
6666 |
|
|
|
6667 |
|
|
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
|
6668 |
|
|
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
|
6669 |
|
|
a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
|
6670 |
|
|
Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
|
6671 |
|
|
copyright is claimed for the compilation. Such a compilation is
|
6672 |
|
|
called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
|
6673 |
|
|
other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
|
6674 |
|
|
account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
|
6675 |
|
|
derivative works of the Document.
|
6676 |
|
|
|
6677 |
|
|
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
|
6678 |
|
|
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
|
6679 |
|
|
quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
|
6680 |
|
|
placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
|
6681 |
|
|
aggregate. Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
|
6682 |
|
|
aggregate.
|
6683 |
|
|
|
6684 |
|
|
8. TRANSLATION
|
6685 |
|
|
|
6686 |
|
|
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
|
6687 |
|
|
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
|
6688 |
|
|
4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
|
6689 |
|
|
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
|
6690 |
|
|
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
|
6691 |
|
|
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
|
6692 |
|
|
translation of this License provided that you also include the
|
6693 |
|
|
original English version of this License. In case of a
|
6694 |
|
|
disagreement between the translation and the original English
|
6695 |
|
|
version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
|
6696 |
|
|
|
6697 |
|
|
9. TERMINATION
|
6698 |
|
|
|
6699 |
|
|
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
|
6700 |
|
|
except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other
|
6701 |
|
|
attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
|
6702 |
|
|
void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
|
6703 |
|
|
License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
|
6704 |
|
|
from you under this License will not have their licenses
|
6705 |
|
|
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
|
6706 |
|
|
|
6707 |
|
|
10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
|
6708 |
|
|
|
6709 |
|
|
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
|
6710 |
|
|
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
|
6711 |
|
|
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
|
6712 |
|
|
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
|
6713 |
|
|
http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
|
6714 |
|
|
|
6715 |
|
|
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
|
6716 |
|
|
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
|
6717 |
|
|
version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
|
6718 |
|
|
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
|
6719 |
|
|
that specified version or of any later version that has been
|
6720 |
|
|
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If
|
6721 |
|
|
the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
|
6722 |
|
|
you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
|
6723 |
|
|
Free Software Foundation.
|
6724 |
|
|
|
6725 |
|
|
|
6726 |
|
|
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
|
6727 |
|
|
====================================================
|
6728 |
|
|
|
6729 |
|
|
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
|
6730 |
|
|
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
|
6731 |
|
|
notices just after the title page:
|
6732 |
|
|
|
6733 |
|
|
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME.
|
6734 |
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
6735 |
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
|
6736 |
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
6737 |
|
|
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
|
6738 |
|
|
Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
|
6739 |
|
|
A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
6740 |
|
|
Free Documentation License."
|
6741 |
|
|
|
6742 |
|
|
If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
|
6743 |
|
|
instead of saying which ones are invariant. If you have no Front-Cover
|
6744 |
|
|
Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
|
6745 |
|
|
LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
|
6746 |
|
|
|
6747 |
|
|
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
|
6748 |
|
|
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
|
6749 |
|
|
free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
|
6750 |
|
|
permit their use in free software.
|
6751 |
|
|
|
6752 |
|
|
|
6753 |
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: LD Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top
|
6754 |
|
|
|
6755 |
|
|
LD Index
|
6756 |
|
|
********
|
6757 |
|
|
|
6758 |
|
|
|
6759 |
|
|
* Menu:
|
6760 |
|
|
|
6761 |
|
|
* ": Symbols. (line 6)
|
6762 |
|
|
* -(: Options. (line 675)
|
6763 |
|
|
* --accept-unknown-input-arch: Options. (line 693)
|
6764 |
|
|
* --add-needed: Options. (line 717)
|
6765 |
|
|
* --add-stdcall-alias: Options. (line 1527)
|
6766 |
|
|
* --allow-multiple-definition: Options. (line 945)
|
6767 |
|
|
* --allow-shlib-undefined: Options. (line 951)
|
6768 |
|
|
* --architecture=ARCH: Options. (line 113)
|
6769 |
|
|
* --as-needed: Options. (line 703)
|
6770 |
|
|
* --auxiliary=NAME: Options. (line 235)
|
6771 |
|
|
* --bank-window: Options. (line 1926)
|
6772 |
|
|
* --base-file: Options. (line 1532)
|
6773 |
|
|
* --be8: ARM. (line 28)
|
6774 |
|
|
* --bss-plt: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16)
|
6775 |
|
|
* --build-id: Options. (line 1489)
|
6776 |
|
|
* --build-id=STYLE: Options. (line 1489)
|
6777 |
|
|
* --check-sections: Options. (line 799)
|
6778 |
|
|
* --cref: Options. (line 811)
|
6779 |
|
|
* --default-imported-symver: Options. (line 988)
|
6780 |
|
|
* --default-script=SCRIPT: Options. (line 520)
|
6781 |
|
|
* --default-symver: Options. (line 984)
|
6782 |
|
|
* --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP: Options. (line 839)
|
6783 |
|
|
* --demangle[=STYLE]: Options. (line 852)
|
6784 |
|
|
* --disable-auto-image-base: Options. (line 1701)
|
6785 |
|
|
* --disable-auto-import: Options. (line 1836)
|
6786 |
|
|
* --disable-long-section-names: Options. (line 1542)
|
6787 |
|
|
* --disable-new-dtags: Options. (line 1452)
|
6788 |
|
|
* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc: Options. (line 1849)
|
6789 |
|
|
* --disable-stdcall-fixup: Options. (line 1564)
|
6790 |
|
|
* --discard-all: Options. (line 566)
|
6791 |
|
|
* --discard-locals: Options. (line 570)
|
6792 |
|
|
* --dll: Options. (line 1537)
|
6793 |
|
|
* --dll-search-prefix: Options. (line 1707)
|
6794 |
|
|
* --dotsyms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33)
|
6795 |
|
|
* --dynamic-linker=FILE: Options. (line 865)
|
6796 |
|
|
* --dynamic-list-cpp-new: Options. (line 791)
|
6797 |
|
|
* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo: Options. (line 795)
|
6798 |
|
|
* --dynamic-list-data: Options. (line 788)
|
6799 |
|
|
* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE: Options. (line 775)
|
6800 |
|
|
* --dynamicbase: Options. (line 1885)
|
6801 |
|
|
* --eh-frame-hdr: Options. (line 1448)
|
6802 |
|
|
* --emit-relocs: Options. (line 455)
|
6803 |
|
|
* --emit-stack-syms: SPU ELF. (line 46)
|
6804 |
|
|
* --emit-stub-syms <1>: PowerPC ELF32. (line 47)
|
6805 |
|
|
* --emit-stub-syms <2>: SPU ELF. (line 15)
|
6806 |
|
|
* --emit-stub-syms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 29)
|
6807 |
|
|
* --enable-auto-image-base: Options. (line 1693)
|
6808 |
|
|
* --enable-auto-import: Options. (line 1716)
|
6809 |
|
|
* --enable-extra-pe-debug: Options. (line 1854)
|
6810 |
|
|
* --enable-long-section-names: Options. (line 1542)
|
6811 |
|
|
* --enable-new-dtags: Options. (line 1452)
|
6812 |
|
|
* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc: Options. (line 1841)
|
6813 |
|
|
* --enable-stdcall-fixup: Options. (line 1564)
|
6814 |
|
|
* --entry=ENTRY: Options. (line 167)
|
6815 |
|
|
* --error-unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1401)
|
6816 |
|
|
* --exclude-libs: Options. (line 177)
|
6817 |
|
|
* --exclude-modules-for-implib: Options. (line 188)
|
6818 |
|
|
* --exclude-symbols: Options. (line 1606)
|
6819 |
|
|
* --export-all-symbols: Options. (line 1582)
|
6820 |
|
|
* --export-dynamic: Options. (line 201)
|
6821 |
|
|
* --extra-overlay-stubs: SPU ELF. (line 19)
|
6822 |
|
|
* --fatal-warnings: Options. (line 872)
|
6823 |
|
|
* --file-alignment: Options. (line 1612)
|
6824 |
|
|
* --filter=NAME: Options. (line 256)
|
6825 |
|
|
* --fix-cortex-a8: i960. (line 39)
|
6826 |
|
|
* --fix-v4bx: ARM. (line 49)
|
6827 |
|
|
* --fix-v4bx-interworking: ARM. (line 62)
|
6828 |
|
|
* --force-dynamic: Options. (line 464)
|
6829 |
|
|
* --force-exe-suffix: Options. (line 877)
|
6830 |
|
|
* --forceinteg: Options. (line 1890)
|
6831 |
|
|
* --format=FORMAT: Options. (line 124)
|
6832 |
|
|
* --format=VERSION: TI COFF. (line 6)
|
6833 |
|
|
* --gc-sections: Options. (line 887)
|
6834 |
|
|
* --got: Options. (line 1939)
|
6835 |
|
|
* --got=TYPE: M68K. (line 6)
|
6836 |
|
|
* --gpsize=VALUE: Options. (line 289)
|
6837 |
|
|
* --hash-size=NUMBER: Options. (line 1461)
|
6838 |
|
|
* --hash-style=STYLE: Options. (line 1469)
|
6839 |
|
|
* --heap: Options. (line 1618)
|
6840 |
|
|
* --help: Options. (line 918)
|
6841 |
|
|
* --image-base: Options. (line 1625)
|
6842 |
|
|
* --just-symbols=FILE: Options. (line 487)
|
6843 |
|
|
* --kill-at: Options. (line 1634)
|
6844 |
|
|
* --large-address-aware: Options. (line 1639)
|
6845 |
|
|
* --library-path=DIR: Options. (line 348)
|
6846 |
|
|
* --library=NAMESPEC: Options. (line 315)
|
6847 |
|
|
* --local-store=lo:hi: SPU ELF. (line 24)
|
6848 |
|
|
* --major-image-version: Options. (line 1648)
|
6849 |
|
|
* --major-os-version: Options. (line 1653)
|
6850 |
|
|
* --major-subsystem-version: Options. (line 1657)
|
6851 |
|
|
* --minor-image-version: Options. (line 1662)
|
6852 |
|
|
* --minor-os-version: Options. (line 1667)
|
6853 |
|
|
* --minor-subsystem-version: Options. (line 1671)
|
6854 |
|
|
* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE: Options. (line 148)
|
6855 |
|
|
* --multi-subspace: HPPA ELF32. (line 6)
|
6856 |
|
|
* --nmagic: Options. (line 419)
|
6857 |
|
|
* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch: Options. (line 693)
|
6858 |
|
|
* --no-add-needed: Options. (line 717)
|
6859 |
|
|
* --no-allow-shlib-undefined: Options. (line 951)
|
6860 |
|
|
* --no-as-needed: Options. (line 703)
|
6861 |
|
|
* --no-bind: Options. (line 1904)
|
6862 |
|
|
* --no-check-sections: Options. (line 799)
|
6863 |
|
|
* --no-define-common: Options. (line 823)
|
6864 |
|
|
* --no-demangle: Options. (line 852)
|
6865 |
|
|
* --no-dotsyms: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33)
|
6866 |
|
|
* --no-enum-size-warning: ARM. (line 111)
|
6867 |
|
|
* --no-export-dynamic: Options. (line 201)
|
6868 |
|
|
* --no-fatal-warnings: Options. (line 872)
|
6869 |
|
|
* --no-fix-cortex-a8: i960. (line 39)
|
6870 |
|
|
* --no-gc-sections: Options. (line 887)
|
6871 |
|
|
* --no-isolation: Options. (line 1897)
|
6872 |
|
|
* --no-keep-memory: Options. (line 930)
|
6873 |
|
|
* --no-multi-toc: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 74)
|
6874 |
|
|
* --no-omagic: Options. (line 433)
|
6875 |
|
|
* --no-opd-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 48)
|
6876 |
|
|
* --no-overlays: SPU ELF. (line 9)
|
6877 |
|
|
* --no-print-gc-sections: Options. (line 909)
|
6878 |
|
|
* --no-relax: Xtensa. (line 56)
|
6879 |
|
|
* --no-seh: Options. (line 1900)
|
6880 |
|
|
* --no-tls-optimize <1>: PowerPC ELF32. (line 51)
|
6881 |
|
|
* --no-tls-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 43)
|
6882 |
|
|
* --no-toc-optimize: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 60)
|
6883 |
|
|
* --no-trampoline: Options. (line 1920)
|
6884 |
|
|
* --no-undefined: Options. (line 937)
|
6885 |
|
|
* --no-undefined-version: Options. (line 979)
|
6886 |
|
|
* --no-warn-mismatch: Options. (line 992)
|
6887 |
|
|
* --no-warn-search-mismatch: Options. (line 1001)
|
6888 |
|
|
* --no-wchar-size-warning: ARM. (line 118)
|
6889 |
|
|
* --no-whole-archive: Options. (line 1005)
|
6890 |
|
|
* --noinhibit-exec: Options. (line 1009)
|
6891 |
|
|
* --non-overlapping-opd: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 54)
|
6892 |
|
|
* --nxcompat: Options. (line 1893)
|
6893 |
|
|
* --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT: Options. (line 1021)
|
6894 |
|
|
* --omagic: Options. (line 424)
|
6895 |
|
|
* --out-implib: Options. (line 1684)
|
6896 |
|
|
* --output-def: Options. (line 1676)
|
6897 |
|
|
* --output=OUTPUT: Options. (line 439)
|
6898 |
|
|
* --pic-executable: Options. (line 1034)
|
6899 |
|
|
* --pic-veneer: ARM. (line 124)
|
6900 |
|
|
* --plugin: SPU ELF. (line 6)
|
6901 |
|
|
* --print-gc-sections: Options. (line 909)
|
6902 |
|
|
* --print-map: Options. (line 382)
|
6903 |
|
|
* --reduce-memory-overheads: Options. (line 1475)
|
6904 |
|
|
* --relax: Options. (line 1050)
|
6905 |
|
|
* --relax on i960: i960. (line 31)
|
6906 |
|
|
* --relax on PowerPC: PowerPC ELF32. (line 6)
|
6907 |
|
|
* --relax on Xtensa: Xtensa. (line 27)
|
6908 |
|
|
* --relocatable: Options. (line 468)
|
6909 |
|
|
* --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME: Options. (line 1071)
|
6910 |
|
|
* --script=SCRIPT: Options. (line 511)
|
6911 |
|
|
* --sdata-got: PowerPC ELF32. (line 33)
|
6912 |
|
|
* --section-alignment: Options. (line 1859)
|
6913 |
|
|
* --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG: Options. (line 1227)
|
6914 |
|
|
* --secure-plt: PowerPC ELF32. (line 26)
|
6915 |
|
|
* --sort-common: Options. (line 1169)
|
6916 |
|
|
* --sort-section=alignment: Options. (line 1184)
|
6917 |
|
|
* --sort-section=name: Options. (line 1180)
|
6918 |
|
|
* --split-by-file: Options. (line 1188)
|
6919 |
|
|
* --split-by-reloc: Options. (line 1193)
|
6920 |
|
|
* --stack: Options. (line 1865)
|
6921 |
|
|
* --stack-analysis: SPU ELF. (line 29)
|
6922 |
|
|
* --stats: Options. (line 1206)
|
6923 |
|
|
* --strip-all: Options. (line 498)
|
6924 |
|
|
* --strip-debug: Options. (line 502)
|
6925 |
|
|
* --stub-group-size: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6)
|
6926 |
|
|
* --stub-group-size=N <1>: ARM. (line 129)
|
6927 |
|
|
* --stub-group-size=N: HPPA ELF32. (line 12)
|
6928 |
|
|
* --subsystem: Options. (line 1872)
|
6929 |
|
|
* --support-old-code: ARM. (line 6)
|
6930 |
|
|
* --sysroot=DIRECTORY: Options. (line 1210)
|
6931 |
|
|
* --target-help: Options. (line 922)
|
6932 |
|
|
* --target1-abs: ARM. (line 32)
|
6933 |
|
|
* --target1-rel: ARM. (line 32)
|
6934 |
|
|
* --target2=TYPE: ARM. (line 37)
|
6935 |
|
|
* --thumb-entry=ENTRY: ARM. (line 17)
|
6936 |
|
|
* --trace: Options. (line 507)
|
6937 |
|
|
* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL: Options. (line 576)
|
6938 |
|
|
* --traditional-format: Options. (line 1215)
|
6939 |
|
|
* --tsaware: Options. (line 1910)
|
6940 |
|
|
* --undefined=SYMBOL: Options. (line 533)
|
6941 |
|
|
* --unique[=SECTION]: Options. (line 551)
|
6942 |
|
|
* --unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1246)
|
6943 |
|
|
* --use-blx: ARM. (line 74)
|
6944 |
|
|
* --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables: ARM. (line 23)
|
6945 |
|
|
* --verbose: Options. (line 1275)
|
6946 |
|
|
* --version: Options. (line 560)
|
6947 |
|
|
* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE: Options. (line 1281)
|
6948 |
|
|
* --vfp11-denorm-fix: ARM. (line 83)
|
6949 |
|
|
* --warn-alternate-em: Options. (line 1393)
|
6950 |
|
|
* --warn-common: Options. (line 1292)
|
6951 |
|
|
* --warn-constructors: Options. (line 1360)
|
6952 |
|
|
* --warn-multiple-gp: Options. (line 1365)
|
6953 |
|
|
* --warn-once: Options. (line 1379)
|
6954 |
|
|
* --warn-section-align: Options. (line 1383)
|
6955 |
|
|
* --warn-shared-textrel: Options. (line 1390)
|
6956 |
|
|
* --warn-unresolved-symbols: Options. (line 1396)
|
6957 |
|
|
* --wdmdriver: Options. (line 1907)
|
6958 |
|
|
* --whole-archive: Options. (line 1405)
|
6959 |
|
|
* --wrap=SYMBOL: Options. (line 1419)
|
6960 |
|
|
* -A ARCH: Options. (line 112)
|
6961 |
|
|
* -a KEYWORD: Options. (line 105)
|
6962 |
|
|
* -assert KEYWORD: Options. (line 727)
|
6963 |
|
|
* -b FORMAT: Options. (line 124)
|
6964 |
|
|
* -Bdynamic: Options. (line 730)
|
6965 |
|
|
* -Bgroup: Options. (line 740)
|
6966 |
|
|
* -Bshareable: Options. (line 1162)
|
6967 |
|
|
* -Bstatic: Options. (line 747)
|
6968 |
|
|
* -Bsymbolic: Options. (line 762)
|
6969 |
|
|
* -Bsymbolic-functions: Options. (line 769)
|
6970 |
|
|
* -c MRI-CMDFILE: Options. (line 148)
|
6971 |
|
|
* -call_shared: Options. (line 730)
|
6972 |
|
|
* -d: Options. (line 158)
|
6973 |
|
|
* -dc: Options. (line 158)
|
6974 |
|
|
* -dn: Options. (line 747)
|
6975 |
|
|
* -dp: Options. (line 158)
|
6976 |
|
|
* -dT SCRIPT: Options. (line 520)
|
6977 |
|
|
* -dy: Options. (line 730)
|
6978 |
|
|
* -E: Options. (line 201)
|
6979 |
|
|
* -e ENTRY: Options. (line 167)
|
6980 |
|
|
* -EB: Options. (line 228)
|
6981 |
|
|
* -EL: Options. (line 231)
|
6982 |
|
|
* -F NAME: Options. (line 256)
|
6983 |
|
|
* -f NAME: Options. (line 235)
|
6984 |
|
|
* -fini=NAME: Options. (line 280)
|
6985 |
|
|
* -g: Options. (line 286)
|
6986 |
|
|
* -G VALUE: Options. (line 289)
|
6987 |
|
|
* -h NAME: Options. (line 297)
|
6988 |
|
|
* -i: Options. (line 306)
|
6989 |
|
|
* -IFILE: Options. (line 865)
|
6990 |
|
|
* -init=NAME: Options. (line 309)
|
6991 |
|
|
* -L DIR: Options. (line 348)
|
6992 |
|
|
* -l NAMESPEC: Options. (line 315)
|
6993 |
|
|
* -M: Options. (line 382)
|
6994 |
|
|
* -m EMULATION: Options. (line 372)
|
6995 |
|
|
* -Map=MAPFILE: Options. (line 926)
|
6996 |
|
|
* -N: Options. (line 424)
|
6997 |
|
|
* -n: Options. (line 419)
|
6998 |
|
|
* -non_shared: Options. (line 747)
|
6999 |
|
|
* -nostdlib: Options. (line 1015)
|
7000 |
|
|
* -O LEVEL: Options. (line 445)
|
7001 |
|
|
* -o OUTPUT: Options. (line 439)
|
7002 |
|
|
* -pie: Options. (line 1034)
|
7003 |
|
|
* -q: Options. (line 455)
|
7004 |
|
|
* -qmagic: Options. (line 1044)
|
7005 |
|
|
* -Qy: Options. (line 1047)
|
7006 |
|
|
* -r: Options. (line 468)
|
7007 |
|
|
* -R FILE: Options. (line 487)
|
7008 |
|
|
* -rpath-link=DIR: Options. (line 1107)
|
7009 |
|
|
* -rpath=DIR: Options. (line 1085)
|
7010 |
|
|
* -s: Options. (line 498)
|
7011 |
|
|
* -S: Options. (line 502)
|
7012 |
|
|
* -shared: Options. (line 1162)
|
7013 |
|
|
* -soname=NAME: Options. (line 297)
|
7014 |
|
|
* -static: Options. (line 747)
|
7015 |
|
|
* -t: Options. (line 507)
|
7016 |
|
|
* -T SCRIPT: Options. (line 511)
|
7017 |
|
|
* -Tbss=ORG: Options. (line 1236)
|
7018 |
|
|
* -Tdata=ORG: Options. (line 1236)
|
7019 |
|
|
* -Ttext-segment=ORG: Options. (line 1242)
|
7020 |
|
|
* -Ttext=ORG: Options. (line 1236)
|
7021 |
|
|
* -u SYMBOL: Options. (line 533)
|
7022 |
|
|
* -Ur: Options. (line 541)
|
7023 |
|
|
* -V: Options. (line 560)
|
7024 |
|
|
* -v: Options. (line 560)
|
7025 |
|
|
* -X: Options. (line 570)
|
7026 |
|
|
* -x: Options. (line 566)
|
7027 |
|
|
* -Y PATH: Options. (line 585)
|
7028 |
|
|
* -y SYMBOL: Options. (line 576)
|
7029 |
|
|
* -z defs: Options. (line 937)
|
7030 |
|
|
* -z KEYWORD: Options. (line 589)
|
7031 |
|
|
* -z muldefs: Options. (line 945)
|
7032 |
|
|
* .: Location Counter. (line 6)
|
7033 |
|
|
* /DISCARD/: Output Section Discarding.
|
7034 |
|
|
(line 21)
|
7035 |
|
|
* :PHDR: Output Section Phdr.
|
7036 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7037 |
|
|
* =FILLEXP: Output Section Fill.
|
7038 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7039 |
|
|
* >REGION: Output Section Region.
|
7040 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7041 |
|
|
* [COMMON]: Input Section Common.
|
7042 |
|
|
(line 29)
|
7043 |
|
|
* ABSOLUTE (MRI): MRI. (line 33)
|
7044 |
|
|
* absolute and relocatable symbols: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7045 |
|
|
* absolute expressions: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7046 |
|
|
* ABSOLUTE(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 10)
|
7047 |
|
|
* ADDR(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 17)
|
7048 |
|
|
* address, section: Output Section Address.
|
7049 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7050 |
|
|
* ALIAS (MRI): MRI. (line 44)
|
7051 |
|
|
* ALIGN (MRI): MRI. (line 50)
|
7052 |
|
|
* align expression: Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7053 |
|
|
* align location counter: Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7054 |
|
|
* ALIGN(ALIGN): Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7055 |
|
|
* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN): Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7056 |
|
|
* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN): Forced Output Alignment.
|
7057 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7058 |
|
|
* aligned common symbols: WIN32. (line 418)
|
7059 |
|
|
* ALIGNOF(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 62)
|
7060 |
|
|
* allocating memory: MEMORY. (line 6)
|
7061 |
|
|
* architecture: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7062 |
|
|
(line 72)
|
7063 |
|
|
* architectures: Options. (line 112)
|
7064 |
|
|
* archive files, from cmd line: Options. (line 315)
|
7065 |
|
|
* archive search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74)
|
7066 |
|
|
* arithmetic: Expressions. (line 6)
|
7067 |
|
|
* arithmetic operators: Operators. (line 6)
|
7068 |
|
|
* ARM interworking support: ARM. (line 6)
|
7069 |
|
|
* AS_NEEDED(FILES): File Commands. (line 54)
|
7070 |
|
|
* ASSERT: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7071 |
|
|
(line 9)
|
7072 |
|
|
* assertion in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7073 |
|
|
(line 9)
|
7074 |
|
|
* assignment in scripts: Assignments. (line 6)
|
7075 |
|
|
* AT(LMA): Output Section LMA. (line 6)
|
7076 |
|
|
* AT>LMA_REGION: Output Section LMA. (line 6)
|
7077 |
|
|
* automatic data imports: WIN32. (line 185)
|
7078 |
|
|
* back end: BFD. (line 6)
|
7079 |
|
|
* BASE (MRI): MRI. (line 54)
|
7080 |
|
|
* BE8: ARM. (line 28)
|
7081 |
|
|
* BFD canonical format: Canonical format. (line 11)
|
7082 |
|
|
* BFD requirements: BFD. (line 16)
|
7083 |
|
|
* big-endian objects: Options. (line 228)
|
7084 |
|
|
* binary input format: Options. (line 124)
|
7085 |
|
|
* BLOCK(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 75)
|
7086 |
|
|
* bug criteria: Bug Criteria. (line 6)
|
7087 |
|
|
* bug reports: Bug Reporting. (line 6)
|
7088 |
|
|
* bugs in ld: Reporting Bugs. (line 6)
|
7089 |
|
|
* BYTE(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7090 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7091 |
|
|
* C++ constructors, arranging in link: Output Section Keywords.
|
7092 |
|
|
(line 19)
|
7093 |
|
|
* CHIP (MRI): MRI. (line 58)
|
7094 |
|
|
* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE: Environment. (line 29)
|
7095 |
|
|
* combining symbols, warnings on: Options. (line 1292)
|
7096 |
|
|
* command files: Scripts. (line 6)
|
7097 |
|
|
* command line: Options. (line 6)
|
7098 |
|
|
* common allocation: Options. (line 158)
|
7099 |
|
|
* common allocation in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7100 |
|
|
(line 20)
|
7101 |
|
|
* common symbol placement: Input Section Common.
|
7102 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7103 |
|
|
* COMMONPAGESIZE: Symbolic Constants. (line 13)
|
7104 |
|
|
* compatibility, MRI: Options. (line 148)
|
7105 |
|
|
* CONSTANT: Symbolic Constants. (line 6)
|
7106 |
|
|
* constants in linker scripts: Constants. (line 6)
|
7107 |
|
|
* constraints on output sections: Output Section Constraint.
|
7108 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7109 |
|
|
* CONSTRUCTORS: Output Section Keywords.
|
7110 |
|
|
(line 19)
|
7111 |
|
|
* constructors: Options. (line 541)
|
7112 |
|
|
* constructors, arranging in link: Output Section Keywords.
|
7113 |
|
|
(line 19)
|
7114 |
|
|
* Cortex-A8 erratum workaround: i960. (line 39)
|
7115 |
|
|
* crash of linker: Bug Criteria. (line 9)
|
7116 |
|
|
* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS: Output Section Keywords.
|
7117 |
|
|
(line 9)
|
7118 |
|
|
* creating a DEF file: WIN32. (line 152)
|
7119 |
|
|
* cross reference table: Options. (line 811)
|
7120 |
|
|
* cross references: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7121 |
|
|
(line 56)
|
7122 |
|
|
* current output location: Location Counter. (line 6)
|
7123 |
|
|
* data: Output Section Data.
|
7124 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7125 |
|
|
* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
|
7126 |
|
|
(line 80)
|
7127 |
|
|
* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 101)
|
7128 |
|
|
* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 107)
|
7129 |
|
|
* dbx: Options. (line 1220)
|
7130 |
|
|
* DEF files, creating: Options. (line 1676)
|
7131 |
|
|
* default emulation: Environment. (line 21)
|
7132 |
|
|
* default input format: Environment. (line 9)
|
7133 |
|
|
* DEFINED(SYMBOL): Builtin Functions. (line 118)
|
7134 |
|
|
* deleting local symbols: Options. (line 566)
|
7135 |
|
|
* demangling, default: Environment. (line 29)
|
7136 |
|
|
* demangling, from command line: Options. (line 852)
|
7137 |
|
|
* direct linking to a dll: WIN32. (line 233)
|
7138 |
|
|
* discarding sections: Output Section Discarding.
|
7139 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7140 |
|
|
* discontinuous memory: MEMORY. (line 6)
|
7141 |
|
|
* DLLs, creating: Options. (line 1676)
|
7142 |
|
|
* DLLs, linking to: Options. (line 1707)
|
7143 |
|
|
* dot: Location Counter. (line 6)
|
7144 |
|
|
* dot inside sections: Location Counter. (line 36)
|
7145 |
|
|
* dot outside sections: Location Counter. (line 66)
|
7146 |
|
|
* dynamic linker, from command line: Options. (line 865)
|
7147 |
|
|
* dynamic symbol table: Options. (line 201)
|
7148 |
|
|
* ELF program headers: PHDRS. (line 6)
|
7149 |
|
|
* emulation: Options. (line 372)
|
7150 |
|
|
* emulation, default: Environment. (line 21)
|
7151 |
|
|
* END (MRI): MRI. (line 62)
|
7152 |
|
|
* endianness: Options. (line 228)
|
7153 |
|
|
* entry point: Entry Point. (line 6)
|
7154 |
|
|
* entry point, from command line: Options. (line 167)
|
7155 |
|
|
* entry point, thumb: ARM. (line 17)
|
7156 |
|
|
* ENTRY(SYMBOL): Entry Point. (line 6)
|
7157 |
|
|
* error on valid input: Bug Criteria. (line 12)
|
7158 |
|
|
* example of linker script: Simple Example. (line 6)
|
7159 |
|
|
* exporting DLL symbols: WIN32. (line 19)
|
7160 |
|
|
* expression evaluation order: Evaluation. (line 6)
|
7161 |
|
|
* expression sections: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7162 |
|
|
* expression, absolute: Builtin Functions. (line 10)
|
7163 |
|
|
* expressions: Expressions. (line 6)
|
7164 |
|
|
* EXTERN: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7165 |
|
|
(line 13)
|
7166 |
|
|
* fatal signal: Bug Criteria. (line 9)
|
7167 |
|
|
* file name wildcard patterns: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7168 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7169 |
|
|
* FILEHDR: PHDRS. (line 61)
|
7170 |
|
|
* filename symbols: Output Section Keywords.
|
7171 |
|
|
(line 9)
|
7172 |
|
|
* fill pattern, entire section: Output Section Fill.
|
7173 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7174 |
|
|
* FILL(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7175 |
|
|
(line 39)
|
7176 |
|
|
* finalization function: Options. (line 280)
|
7177 |
|
|
* first input file: File Commands. (line 82)
|
7178 |
|
|
* first instruction: Entry Point. (line 6)
|
7179 |
|
|
* FIX_V4BX: ARM. (line 49)
|
7180 |
|
|
* FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING: ARM. (line 62)
|
7181 |
|
|
* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7182 |
|
|
(line 20)
|
7183 |
|
|
* forcing input section alignment: Forced Input Alignment.
|
7184 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7185 |
|
|
* forcing output section alignment: Forced Output Alignment.
|
7186 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7187 |
|
|
* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options. (line 464)
|
7188 |
|
|
* FORMAT (MRI): MRI. (line 66)
|
7189 |
|
|
* functions in expressions: Builtin Functions. (line 6)
|
7190 |
|
|
* garbage collection <1>: Options. (line 909)
|
7191 |
|
|
* garbage collection <2>: Input Section Keep. (line 6)
|
7192 |
|
|
* garbage collection: Options. (line 887)
|
7193 |
|
|
* generating optimized output: Options. (line 445)
|
7194 |
|
|
* GNU linker: Overview. (line 6)
|
7195 |
|
|
* GNUTARGET: Environment. (line 9)
|
7196 |
|
|
* GROUP(FILES): File Commands. (line 47)
|
7197 |
|
|
* grouping input files: File Commands. (line 47)
|
7198 |
|
|
* groups of archives: Options. (line 675)
|
7199 |
|
|
* H8/300 support: H8/300. (line 6)
|
7200 |
|
|
* header size: Builtin Functions. (line 183)
|
7201 |
|
|
* heap size: Options. (line 1618)
|
7202 |
|
|
* help: Options. (line 918)
|
7203 |
|
|
* holes: Location Counter. (line 12)
|
7204 |
|
|
* holes, filling: Output Section Data.
|
7205 |
|
|
(line 39)
|
7206 |
|
|
* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs: HPPA ELF32. (line 6)
|
7207 |
|
|
* HPPA stub grouping: HPPA ELF32. (line 12)
|
7208 |
|
|
* i960 support: i960. (line 6)
|
7209 |
|
|
* image base: Options. (line 1625)
|
7210 |
|
|
* implicit linker scripts: Implicit Linker Scripts.
|
7211 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7212 |
|
|
* import libraries: WIN32. (line 10)
|
7213 |
|
|
* INCLUDE FILENAME: File Commands. (line 9)
|
7214 |
|
|
* including a linker script: File Commands. (line 9)
|
7215 |
|
|
* including an entire archive: Options. (line 1405)
|
7216 |
|
|
* incremental link: Options. (line 306)
|
7217 |
|
|
* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7218 |
|
|
(line 25)
|
7219 |
|
|
* initialization function: Options. (line 309)
|
7220 |
|
|
* initialized data in ROM: Output Section LMA. (line 26)
|
7221 |
|
|
* input file format in linker script: Format Commands. (line 35)
|
7222 |
|
|
* input filename symbols: Output Section Keywords.
|
7223 |
|
|
(line 9)
|
7224 |
|
|
* input files in linker scripts: File Commands. (line 19)
|
7225 |
|
|
* input files, displaying: Options. (line 507)
|
7226 |
|
|
* input format: Options. (line 124)
|
7227 |
|
|
* input object files in linker scripts: File Commands. (line 19)
|
7228 |
|
|
* input section alignment: Forced Input Alignment.
|
7229 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7230 |
|
|
* input section basics: Input Section Basics.
|
7231 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7232 |
|
|
* input section wildcards: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7233 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7234 |
|
|
* input sections: Input Section. (line 6)
|
7235 |
|
|
* INPUT(FILES): File Commands. (line 19)
|
7236 |
|
|
* INSERT: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7237 |
|
|
(line 30)
|
7238 |
|
|
* insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7239 |
|
|
(line 30)
|
7240 |
|
|
* integer notation: Constants. (line 6)
|
7241 |
|
|
* integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15)
|
7242 |
|
|
* internal object-file format: Canonical format. (line 11)
|
7243 |
|
|
* invalid input: Bug Criteria. (line 14)
|
7244 |
|
|
* K and M integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15)
|
7245 |
|
|
* KEEP: Input Section Keep. (line 6)
|
7246 |
|
|
* l =: MEMORY. (line 74)
|
7247 |
|
|
* lazy evaluation: Evaluation. (line 6)
|
7248 |
|
|
* ld bugs, reporting: Bug Reporting. (line 6)
|
7249 |
|
|
* LDEMULATION: Environment. (line 21)
|
7250 |
|
|
* len =: MEMORY. (line 74)
|
7251 |
|
|
* LENGTH =: MEMORY. (line 74)
|
7252 |
|
|
* LENGTH(MEMORY): Builtin Functions. (line 135)
|
7253 |
|
|
* library search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74)
|
7254 |
|
|
* link map: Options. (line 382)
|
7255 |
|
|
* link-time runtime library search path: Options. (line 1107)
|
7256 |
|
|
* linker crash: Bug Criteria. (line 9)
|
7257 |
|
|
* linker script concepts: Basic Script Concepts.
|
7258 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7259 |
|
|
* linker script example: Simple Example. (line 6)
|
7260 |
|
|
* linker script file commands: File Commands. (line 6)
|
7261 |
|
|
* linker script format: Script Format. (line 6)
|
7262 |
|
|
* linker script input object files: File Commands. (line 19)
|
7263 |
|
|
* linker script simple commands: Simple Commands. (line 6)
|
7264 |
|
|
* linker scripts: Scripts. (line 6)
|
7265 |
|
|
* LIST (MRI): MRI. (line 77)
|
7266 |
|
|
* little-endian objects: Options. (line 231)
|
7267 |
|
|
* LOAD (MRI): MRI. (line 84)
|
7268 |
|
|
* load address: Output Section LMA. (line 6)
|
7269 |
|
|
* LOADADDR(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 138)
|
7270 |
|
|
* loading, preventing: Output Section Type.
|
7271 |
|
|
(line 22)
|
7272 |
|
|
* local symbols, deleting: Options. (line 570)
|
7273 |
|
|
* location counter: Location Counter. (line 6)
|
7274 |
|
|
* LONG(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7275 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7276 |
|
|
* M and K integer suffixes: Constants. (line 15)
|
7277 |
|
|
* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 6)
|
7278 |
|
|
* machine architecture: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7279 |
|
|
(line 72)
|
7280 |
|
|
* machine dependencies: Machine Dependent. (line 6)
|
7281 |
|
|
* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section. (line 6)
|
7282 |
|
|
* MAX: Builtin Functions. (line 143)
|
7283 |
|
|
* MAXPAGESIZE: Symbolic Constants. (line 10)
|
7284 |
|
|
* MEMORY: MEMORY. (line 6)
|
7285 |
|
|
* memory region attributes: MEMORY. (line 34)
|
7286 |
|
|
* memory regions: MEMORY. (line 6)
|
7287 |
|
|
* memory regions and sections: Output Section Region.
|
7288 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7289 |
|
|
* memory usage: Options. (line 930)
|
7290 |
|
|
* MIN: Builtin Functions. (line 146)
|
7291 |
|
|
* Motorola 68K GOT generation: M68K. (line 6)
|
7292 |
|
|
* MRI compatibility: MRI. (line 6)
|
7293 |
|
|
* MSP430 extra sections: MSP430. (line 11)
|
7294 |
|
|
* NAME (MRI): MRI. (line 90)
|
7295 |
|
|
* name, section: Output Section Name.
|
7296 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7297 |
|
|
* names: Symbols. (line 6)
|
7298 |
|
|
* naming the output file: Options. (line 439)
|
7299 |
|
|
* NEXT(EXP): Builtin Functions. (line 150)
|
7300 |
|
|
* NMAGIC: Options. (line 419)
|
7301 |
|
|
* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING: ARM. (line 111)
|
7302 |
|
|
* NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING: ARM. (line 118)
|
7303 |
|
|
* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS): Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7304 |
|
|
(line 56)
|
7305 |
|
|
* NOLOAD: Output Section Type.
|
7306 |
|
|
(line 22)
|
7307 |
|
|
* not enough room for program headers: Builtin Functions. (line 188)
|
7308 |
|
|
* o =: MEMORY. (line 69)
|
7309 |
|
|
* objdump -i: BFD. (line 6)
|
7310 |
|
|
* object file management: BFD. (line 6)
|
7311 |
|
|
* object files: Options. (line 29)
|
7312 |
|
|
* object formats available: BFD. (line 6)
|
7313 |
|
|
* object size: Options. (line 289)
|
7314 |
|
|
* OMAGIC: Options. (line 424)
|
7315 |
|
|
* ONLY_IF_RO: Output Section Constraint.
|
7316 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7317 |
|
|
* ONLY_IF_RW: Output Section Constraint.
|
7318 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7319 |
|
|
* opening object files: BFD outline. (line 6)
|
7320 |
|
|
* operators for arithmetic: Operators. (line 6)
|
7321 |
|
|
* options: Options. (line 6)
|
7322 |
|
|
* ORDER (MRI): MRI. (line 95)
|
7323 |
|
|
* org =: MEMORY. (line 69)
|
7324 |
|
|
* ORIGIN =: MEMORY. (line 69)
|
7325 |
|
|
* ORIGIN(MEMORY): Builtin Functions. (line 156)
|
7326 |
|
|
* orphan: Orphan Sections. (line 6)
|
7327 |
|
|
* output file after errors: Options. (line 1009)
|
7328 |
|
|
* output file format in linker script: Format Commands. (line 10)
|
7329 |
|
|
* output file name in linker script: File Commands. (line 64)
|
7330 |
|
|
* output section alignment: Forced Output Alignment.
|
7331 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7332 |
|
|
* output section attributes: Output Section Attributes.
|
7333 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7334 |
|
|
* output section data: Output Section Data.
|
7335 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7336 |
|
|
* OUTPUT(FILENAME): File Commands. (line 64)
|
7337 |
|
|
* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH): Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7338 |
|
|
(line 72)
|
7339 |
|
|
* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME): Format Commands. (line 10)
|
7340 |
|
|
* OVERLAY: Overlay Description.
|
7341 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7342 |
|
|
* overlays: Overlay Description.
|
7343 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7344 |
|
|
* partial link: Options. (line 468)
|
7345 |
|
|
* PE import table prefixing: ARM. (line 23)
|
7346 |
|
|
* PHDRS: PHDRS. (line 61)
|
7347 |
|
|
* PIC_VENEER: ARM. (line 124)
|
7348 |
|
|
* position independent executables: Options. (line 1036)
|
7349 |
|
|
* PowerPC ELF32 options: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16)
|
7350 |
|
|
* PowerPC GOT: PowerPC ELF32. (line 33)
|
7351 |
|
|
* PowerPC long branches: PowerPC ELF32. (line 6)
|
7352 |
|
|
* PowerPC PLT: PowerPC ELF32. (line 16)
|
7353 |
|
|
* PowerPC stub symbols: PowerPC ELF32. (line 47)
|
7354 |
|
|
* PowerPC TLS optimization: PowerPC ELF32. (line 51)
|
7355 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 dot symbols: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 33)
|
7356 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 ELF64 options: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6)
|
7357 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 multi-TOC: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 74)
|
7358 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 OPD optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 48)
|
7359 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 OPD spacing: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 54)
|
7360 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 stub grouping: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 6)
|
7361 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 stub symbols: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 29)
|
7362 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 TLS optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 43)
|
7363 |
|
|
* PowerPC64 TOC optimization: PowerPC64 ELF64. (line 60)
|
7364 |
|
|
* precedence in expressions: Operators. (line 6)
|
7365 |
|
|
* prevent unnecessary loading: Output Section Type.
|
7366 |
|
|
(line 22)
|
7367 |
|
|
* program headers: PHDRS. (line 6)
|
7368 |
|
|
* program headers and sections: Output Section Phdr.
|
7369 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7370 |
|
|
* program headers, not enough room: Builtin Functions. (line 188)
|
7371 |
|
|
* program segments: PHDRS. (line 6)
|
7372 |
|
|
* PROVIDE: PROVIDE. (line 6)
|
7373 |
|
|
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN: PROVIDE_HIDDEN. (line 6)
|
7374 |
|
|
* PUBLIC (MRI): MRI. (line 103)
|
7375 |
|
|
* QUAD(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7376 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7377 |
|
|
* quoted symbol names: Symbols. (line 6)
|
7378 |
|
|
* read-only text: Options. (line 419)
|
7379 |
|
|
* read/write from cmd line: Options. (line 424)
|
7380 |
|
|
* region alias: REGION_ALIAS. (line 6)
|
7381 |
|
|
* region names: REGION_ALIAS. (line 6)
|
7382 |
|
|
* REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION): REGION_ALIAS. (line 6)
|
7383 |
|
|
* regions of memory: MEMORY. (line 6)
|
7384 |
|
|
* relative expressions: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7385 |
|
|
* relaxing addressing modes: Options. (line 1050)
|
7386 |
|
|
* relaxing on H8/300: H8/300. (line 9)
|
7387 |
|
|
* relaxing on i960: i960. (line 31)
|
7388 |
|
|
* relaxing on M68HC11: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 12)
|
7389 |
|
|
* relaxing on Xtensa: Xtensa. (line 27)
|
7390 |
|
|
* relocatable and absolute symbols: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7391 |
|
|
* relocatable output: Options. (line 468)
|
7392 |
|
|
* removing sections: Output Section Discarding.
|
7393 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7394 |
|
|
* reporting bugs in ld: Reporting Bugs. (line 6)
|
7395 |
|
|
* requirements for BFD: BFD. (line 16)
|
7396 |
|
|
* retain relocations in final executable: Options. (line 455)
|
7397 |
|
|
* retaining specified symbols: Options. (line 1071)
|
7398 |
|
|
* ROM initialized data: Output Section LMA. (line 26)
|
7399 |
|
|
* round up expression: Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7400 |
|
|
* round up location counter: Builtin Functions. (line 36)
|
7401 |
|
|
* runtime library name: Options. (line 297)
|
7402 |
|
|
* runtime library search path: Options. (line 1085)
|
7403 |
|
|
* runtime pseudo-relocation: WIN32. (line 211)
|
7404 |
|
|
* scaled integers: Constants. (line 15)
|
7405 |
|
|
* scommon section: Input Section Common.
|
7406 |
|
|
(line 20)
|
7407 |
|
|
* script files: Options. (line 520)
|
7408 |
|
|
* scripts: Scripts. (line 6)
|
7409 |
|
|
* search directory, from cmd line: Options. (line 348)
|
7410 |
|
|
* search path in linker script: File Commands. (line 74)
|
7411 |
|
|
* SEARCH_DIR(PATH): File Commands. (line 74)
|
7412 |
|
|
* SECT (MRI): MRI. (line 109)
|
7413 |
|
|
* section address: Output Section Address.
|
7414 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7415 |
|
|
* section address in expression: Builtin Functions. (line 17)
|
7416 |
|
|
* section alignment: Builtin Functions. (line 62)
|
7417 |
|
|
* section alignment, warnings on: Options. (line 1383)
|
7418 |
|
|
* section data: Output Section Data.
|
7419 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7420 |
|
|
* section fill pattern: Output Section Fill.
|
7421 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7422 |
|
|
* section load address: Output Section LMA. (line 6)
|
7423 |
|
|
* section load address in expression: Builtin Functions. (line 138)
|
7424 |
|
|
* section name: Output Section Name.
|
7425 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7426 |
|
|
* section name wildcard patterns: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7427 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7428 |
|
|
* section size: Builtin Functions. (line 167)
|
7429 |
|
|
* section, assigning to memory region: Output Section Region.
|
7430 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7431 |
|
|
* section, assigning to program header: Output Section Phdr.
|
7432 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7433 |
|
|
* SECTIONS: SECTIONS. (line 6)
|
7434 |
|
|
* sections, discarding: Output Section Discarding.
|
7435 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7436 |
|
|
* segment origins, cmd line: Options. (line 1236)
|
7437 |
|
|
* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT): Builtin Functions. (line 159)
|
7438 |
|
|
* segments, ELF: PHDRS. (line 6)
|
7439 |
|
|
* shared libraries: Options. (line 1164)
|
7440 |
|
|
* SHORT(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7441 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7442 |
|
|
* SIZEOF(SECTION): Builtin Functions. (line 167)
|
7443 |
|
|
* SIZEOF_HEADERS: Builtin Functions. (line 183)
|
7444 |
|
|
* small common symbols: Input Section Common.
|
7445 |
|
|
(line 20)
|
7446 |
|
|
* SORT: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7447 |
|
|
(line 58)
|
7448 |
|
|
* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7449 |
|
|
(line 54)
|
7450 |
|
|
* SORT_BY_NAME: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7451 |
|
|
(line 46)
|
7452 |
|
|
* SPU: SPU ELF. (line 29)
|
7453 |
|
|
* SPU ELF options: SPU ELF. (line 6)
|
7454 |
|
|
* SPU extra overlay stubs: SPU ELF. (line 19)
|
7455 |
|
|
* SPU local store size: SPU ELF. (line 24)
|
7456 |
|
|
* SPU overlay stub symbols: SPU ELF. (line 15)
|
7457 |
|
|
* SPU overlays: SPU ELF. (line 9)
|
7458 |
|
|
* SPU plugins: SPU ELF. (line 6)
|
7459 |
|
|
* SQUAD(EXPRESSION): Output Section Data.
|
7460 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7461 |
|
|
* stack size: Options. (line 1865)
|
7462 |
|
|
* standard Unix system: Options. (line 7)
|
7463 |
|
|
* start of execution: Entry Point. (line 6)
|
7464 |
|
|
* STARTUP(FILENAME): File Commands. (line 82)
|
7465 |
|
|
* strip all symbols: Options. (line 498)
|
7466 |
|
|
* strip debugger symbols: Options. (line 502)
|
7467 |
|
|
* stripping all but some symbols: Options. (line 1071)
|
7468 |
|
|
* STUB_GROUP_SIZE: ARM. (line 129)
|
7469 |
|
|
* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN): Forced Input Alignment.
|
7470 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7471 |
|
|
* suffixes for integers: Constants. (line 15)
|
7472 |
|
|
* symbol defaults: Builtin Functions. (line 118)
|
7473 |
|
|
* symbol definition, scripts: Assignments. (line 6)
|
7474 |
|
|
* symbol names: Symbols. (line 6)
|
7475 |
|
|
* symbol tracing: Options. (line 576)
|
7476 |
|
|
* symbol versions: VERSION. (line 6)
|
7477 |
|
|
* symbol-only input: Options. (line 487)
|
7478 |
|
|
* symbolic constants: Symbolic Constants. (line 6)
|
7479 |
|
|
* symbols, from command line: Options. (line 839)
|
7480 |
|
|
* symbols, relocatable and absolute: Expression Section. (line 6)
|
7481 |
|
|
* symbols, retaining selectively: Options. (line 1071)
|
7482 |
|
|
* synthesizing linker: Options. (line 1050)
|
7483 |
|
|
* synthesizing on H8/300: H8/300. (line 14)
|
7484 |
|
|
* TARGET(BFDNAME): Format Commands. (line 35)
|
7485 |
|
|
* TARGET1: ARM. (line 32)
|
7486 |
|
|
* TARGET2: ARM. (line 37)
|
7487 |
|
|
* text segment origin, cmd line: Options. (line 1243)
|
7488 |
|
|
* thumb entry point: ARM. (line 17)
|
7489 |
|
|
* TI COFF versions: TI COFF. (line 6)
|
7490 |
|
|
* traditional format: Options. (line 1215)
|
7491 |
|
|
* trampoline generation on M68HC11: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 31)
|
7492 |
|
|
* trampoline generation on M68HC12: M68HC11/68HC12. (line 31)
|
7493 |
|
|
* unallocated address, next: Builtin Functions. (line 150)
|
7494 |
|
|
* undefined symbol: Options. (line 533)
|
7495 |
|
|
* undefined symbol in linker script: Miscellaneous Commands.
|
7496 |
|
|
(line 13)
|
7497 |
|
|
* undefined symbols, warnings on: Options. (line 1379)
|
7498 |
|
|
* uninitialized data placement: Input Section Common.
|
7499 |
|
|
(line 6)
|
7500 |
|
|
* unspecified memory: Output Section Data.
|
7501 |
|
|
(line 39)
|
7502 |
|
|
* usage: Options. (line 918)
|
7503 |
|
|
* USE_BLX: ARM. (line 74)
|
7504 |
|
|
* using a DEF file: WIN32. (line 57)
|
7505 |
|
|
* using auto-export functionality: WIN32. (line 22)
|
7506 |
|
|
* Using decorations: WIN32. (line 156)
|
7507 |
|
|
* variables, defining: Assignments. (line 6)
|
7508 |
|
|
* verbose: Options. (line 1275)
|
7509 |
|
|
* version: Options. (line 560)
|
7510 |
|
|
* version script: VERSION. (line 6)
|
7511 |
|
|
* version script, symbol versions: Options. (line 1281)
|
7512 |
|
|
* VERSION {script text}: VERSION. (line 6)
|
7513 |
|
|
* versions of symbols: VERSION. (line 6)
|
7514 |
|
|
* VFP11_DENORM_FIX: ARM. (line 83)
|
7515 |
|
|
* warnings, on combining symbols: Options. (line 1292)
|
7516 |
|
|
* warnings, on section alignment: Options. (line 1383)
|
7517 |
|
|
* warnings, on undefined symbols: Options. (line 1379)
|
7518 |
|
|
* weak externals: WIN32. (line 401)
|
7519 |
|
|
* what is this?: Overview. (line 6)
|
7520 |
|
|
* wildcard file name patterns: Input Section Wildcards.
|
7521 |
|
|
|
7522 |
|
|
|
7523 |
|
|
* Xtensa processors: Xtensa. (line 6)
|
7524 |
|
|
|
7525 |
|
|
|
7526 |
|
|
|
7527 |
|
|
Tag Table:
|
7528 |
|
|
Node: Top759
|
7529 |
|
|
Node: Overview1542
|
7530 |
|
|
Node: Invocation2656
|
7531 |
|
|
Node: Options3064
|
7532 |
|
|
Node: Environment90607
|
7533 |
|
|
Node: Scripts92367
|
7534 |
|
|
Node: Basic Script Concepts94101
|
7535 |
|
|
Node: Script Format96808
|
7536 |
|
|
Node: Simple Example97671
|
7537 |
|
|
Node: Simple Commands100767
|
7538 |
|
|
Node: Entry Point101273
|
7539 |
|
|
Node: File Commands102032
|
7540 |
|
|
Node: Format Commands106033
|
7541 |
|
|
Node: REGION_ALIAS107989
|
7542 |
|
|
Node: Miscellaneous Commands112821
|
7543 |
|
|
Node: Assignments116197
|
7544 |
|
|
Node: Simple Assignments116688
|
7545 |
|
|
Node: PROVIDE118424
|
7546 |
|
|
Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN119629
|
7547 |
|
|
Node: Source Code Reference119873
|
7548 |
|
|
Node: SECTIONS123453
|
7549 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Description125344
|
7550 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Name126431
|
7551 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Address127307
|
7552 |
|
|
Node: Input Section129027
|
7553 |
|
|
Node: Input Section Basics129828
|
7554 |
|
|
Node: Input Section Wildcards133046
|
7555 |
|
|
Node: Input Section Common137779
|
7556 |
|
|
Node: Input Section Keep139261
|
7557 |
|
|
Node: Input Section Example139751
|
7558 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Data140719
|
7559 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Keywords143496
|
7560 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Discarding147065
|
7561 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Attributes148246
|
7562 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Type149347
|
7563 |
|
|
Node: Output Section LMA150501
|
7564 |
|
|
Node: Forced Output Alignment153014
|
7565 |
|
|
Node: Forced Input Alignment153282
|
7566 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Constraint153671
|
7567 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Region154099
|
7568 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Phdr154532
|
7569 |
|
|
Node: Output Section Fill155196
|
7570 |
|
|
Node: Overlay Description156338
|
7571 |
|
|
Node: MEMORY160641
|
7572 |
|
|
Node: PHDRS164974
|
7573 |
|
|
Node: VERSION170013
|
7574 |
|
|
Node: Expressions178088
|
7575 |
|
|
Node: Constants179017
|
7576 |
|
|
Node: Symbolic Constants179892
|
7577 |
|
|
Node: Symbols180443
|
7578 |
|
|
Node: Orphan Sections181190
|
7579 |
|
|
Node: Location Counter182354
|
7580 |
|
|
Node: Operators186790
|
7581 |
|
|
Node: Evaluation187712
|
7582 |
|
|
Node: Expression Section189076
|
7583 |
|
|
Node: Builtin Functions190565
|
7584 |
|
|
Node: Implicit Linker Scripts198532
|
7585 |
|
|
Node: Machine Dependent199307
|
7586 |
|
|
Node: H8/300200323
|
7587 |
|
|
Node: i960201948
|
7588 |
|
|
Node: M68HC11/68HC12204049
|
7589 |
|
|
Node: ARM205503
|
7590 |
|
|
Node: HPPA ELF32213015
|
7591 |
|
|
Node: M68K214638
|
7592 |
|
|
Node: MMIX215547
|
7593 |
|
|
Node: MSP430216712
|
7594 |
|
|
Node: PowerPC ELF32217761
|
7595 |
|
|
Node: PowerPC64 ELF64220597
|
7596 |
|
|
Node: SPU ELF225013
|
7597 |
|
|
Node: TI COFF227645
|
7598 |
|
|
Node: WIN32228171
|
7599 |
|
|
Node: Xtensa247895
|
7600 |
|
|
Node: BFD251017
|
7601 |
|
|
Node: BFD outline252472
|
7602 |
|
|
Node: BFD information loss253758
|
7603 |
|
|
Node: Canonical format256275
|
7604 |
|
|
Node: Reporting Bugs260632
|
7605 |
|
|
Node: Bug Criteria261326
|
7606 |
|
|
Node: Bug Reporting262025
|
7607 |
|
|
Node: MRI269064
|
7608 |
|
|
Node: GNU Free Documentation License273707
|